JP2023122069A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: game control means (a game control microcomputer 100) for controlling progress of a game; performance control means (a performance control CPU 120) for controlling a performance; and a liquid crystal indicator (an image display device 5). The performance control means displays a glass plate image on the liquid crystal indicator and executes a cracking performance for cracking the glass plate image according to a performance control command transmitted from the game control means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player.

In conventional game machines, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device is likened to glass as a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device is changed step by step, and the display screen is cracked (as a sign image of cracking). After displaying a glass plate), it is possible to display a plurality of fragment images as if the display screen were broken (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-127593 A

However, in Patent Literature 1, there is a problem that it is not possible to increase the interest in the game because it is only possible to execute the effect of simply displaying the fragment image.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the enjoyment of a game.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
A background image can be displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
controlling light emission of the light emitting means using the specific luminance data table when the split image is displayed;
Light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific luminance data table until a specific timing in the display period of the split image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the luminance data table corresponding to the background image (Fig. 61 to FIGS. 63 and 66),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform light emission control of the light emitting means when the split image is displayed.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment; FIG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing contents of a VRAM; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing contents of a VRAM; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of layers; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of big hit types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern in a normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern in a time saving state or a probability variable state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of variation pattern determination tables. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of winning random number value determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing variation categories. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a pending display effect is to be executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a continuous break effect in a normal state. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a line notice effect setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a line notice effect is executed in a normal state and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanation of the effect pattern. It is a diagram. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the presence or absence of background change execution and the effect pattern determination ratio of the background change effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the presence or absence of the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern determination ratio. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of effects that can be executed in the normal state and the effect pattern of the breaking effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of effects that can be executed in the normal state and the effect pattern of the breaking effect; It is explanatory drawing of the content of the production|presentation which can be performed in a time saving state and a probability variable state, and the production|presentation pattern of crack production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the rough execution timing and execution period for every variation pattern of each production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the rough execution timing and execution period for every variation pattern of each production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the rough execution timing and execution period for every variation pattern of each production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing of the rough execution timing and execution period for every variation pattern of each production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation in super reach (alpha). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation in super reach (alpha). It is a figure which shows the flow of the production|presentation in super reach (alpha). It is a diagram showing the flow of production in super reach β. It is a diagram showing the flow of production in super reach β. It is a figure which shows the detail of the operation example of a 1st continuous breaking effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of a 2nd continuation breaking effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a speech announcement effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect B; It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of a part of operation|movement of pseudo|simulated consecutive effects. It is a figure which shows the detail of the operation example of a reach suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the detail of the operation example of a reach suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of weak development production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of a part of operation|movement of strong development production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B; It is a figure which shows the detail of the operation example of cut-in production|presentation. It is a figure showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a big hit. It is a figure showing the details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss; It is an explanatory view for comparing the details of each effect. It is an explanatory view for comparing the details of each effect. It is a timing chart showing the details of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing details of a dialog forewarning effect; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing the details of the background change effect A; 9 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect B; 9 is a timing chart showing details of a pseudo continuous effect; It is a timing chart which shows the detail of reach suggestion production. It is a timing chart showing the details of the weak development effect. It is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development effect A. It is a timing chart showing the details of the strong development production B. 4 is a timing chart showing details of a cut-in effect; It is a timing chart showing the details of the result notification effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in speed of fragment images in each effect; It is a figure which shows the break pattern in break production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of each crack pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of crack pattern A with a white-out image and without a white-out image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a white-out image in crack pattern B; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example with a white-out image and without a white-out image in crack pattern C; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a crack pattern D with a white-out image and without a white-out image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a white-out image in the crack pattern E; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a crack pattern F with a white-out image and without a white-out image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a crack pattern G with a white-out image and without a white-out image; (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a pseudo continuous effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a background change effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a strong development effect B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 4 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 5 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 6 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 7 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 8 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 10 of this invention.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1-1]
The game machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
Before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part, the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed (FIGS. 33 to 36). , FIGS. 45, 46, 52, 63 and 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. Furthermore, since the type of background image differs before and after the fragment image is commonly displayed in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same manner. Different impressions can be suitably given even with one performance, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 1-2]
The game machine of form 1-2 is
Both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed in one variable display,
When the specific effect is executed without executing the predetermined effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed without executing the specific effect (FIGS. 33 to 36). reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution status of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
The game machine of form 1-3 is
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image;
the first predetermined part can be executed while the first background image is being displayed;
a second background image is displayed during execution of the second predetermined part;
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, the degree of expectation that the second background image is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher than when the second background image is displayed by the second background stimulus effect (see FIG. 30).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect or by the second background effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
The game machine of form 1-4-1 is
Both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed in one variable display,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific effect is a effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
There is a higher degree of expectation for control to be in an advantageous state when a predetermined effect is executed before execution of a specific effect than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 33 to 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten interest by making the player expect that both the predetermined effect and the specific effect will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The game machine of form 1-4-2 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The background images are a first background image before the decoration identification information reaches the ready state, a second background image before the decoration identification information reaches the ready state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, and the decoration identification information. and a fourth background image after the decoration identification information is in a reach state and is more advantageous than the third background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with the second background image,
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed together with the fourth background image (see FIGS. 45, 46, 52, 63, and 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The game machine of form 1-4-3 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transmissive image that allows recognition of at least a part of the superimposed second background image,
The fragment image in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed fourth background image to be recognized (see FIGS. 59, 60, and 73).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined part and the specific effect can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
The game machine of form 1-4-4 is
The fragment image can be rotated,
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotating operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image superimposed on the fragment image, and
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least part of the second background image superimposed on the fragment image (see FIGS. 83 and 89).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
The game machine of form 1-4-5 is
When the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 83 and 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 1-5]
The game machine of form 1-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
A fragment image displayed in a manner of moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner of moving in a predetermined direction. (See FIG. 84),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 1-6]
The game machine of form 1-6 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 72).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fragment image can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The game machine of form 1-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect have the same period of time required until they are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 75 and 80).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between the predetermined effect and the specific effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The game machine of form 1-7-2 is
The fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction has different visibility when the display is started and before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 75 and 80).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
The game machine of form 1-7-3 is
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 84). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fragment image can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
The game machine of form 1-8 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect can rotate,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means, and 2, the number of rotation operations performed from when the fragment image is displayed until it disappears in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 83 and 89).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between the predetermined effect and the specific effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
The game machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The display means can display the effect image at a first timing when the first predetermined part shifts to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image over the first period, and it is possible to see the fragment image over the second period after the first period (Fig. 45, FIGS. 46, 52, 63 and 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. can give surprise to the player, and furthermore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image, and to suitably execute the predetermined effect and the specific effect.

[Form 2-2]
The game machine of form 2-2 is
The length of the display period is common between the effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing (see FIGS. 63 and 68).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between the predetermined effect and the specific effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
The game machine of form 2-3 is
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 63).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the fragment image can be started by the effect image without a sense of discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
The game machine of form 2-4 is
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 52),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between the predetermined effect and the specific effect increases, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Mode 3-1]
The game machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed in a manner of moving from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 48, 55, 65, 70, and 72). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. In addition, since the speed at which the fragment image is displayed differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the fragment image is displayed in the same manner, the effect is preferably different. Impression can be given and game interest can be enhanced.

[Mode 3-2]
The game machine of form 3-2 is
In one variable display, the predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while the specific effect can be executed once,
When the predetermined performance is executed a plurality of times, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined performance is executed once,
When the specific effect is executed once, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (see FIGS. 33 to 36).
A gaming machine characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution status of the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
The game machine of form 3-3 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed. ,
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 48(C) and 55(C)),
A gaming machine characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The game machine of form 3-4-1 is
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed in a mode of moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing in the display period, and is not displayed in the display area of the display means from the specific timing. displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed for a second period of time before being displayed;
the second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 72),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 3-4-2]
The game machine of form 3-4-2 is
The effect image can be displayed at the timing when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 70, 72, and 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the specific production from deteriorating.

[Mode 3-5]
The game machine of form 3-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect can rotate,
Among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of fragment images in the specific effect. Among them, the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image is displayed until it disappears in the display area of the display means is larger (see FIG. 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 4-1]
The game machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a non-transmissive image in which at least part of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize,
The fragment image in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the superimposed background image to be recognized (Figs. 48, 55, 59, 60, 65, 70, 82),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even if the fragment image is displayed in the same effect, different impressions can be suitably given, Amusement interest can be enhanced.

[Form 4-2]
The game machine of form 4-2 is
The specific effect is a effect that includes displaying a special image along with displaying a fragment image,
The fragment image and the special image in the specific effect are in a superimposed relationship,
The first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transmissive image that allows at least part of the background image to be recognized,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transparent image that allows at least part of the special image to be recognized,
The third fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is a transmissive image that allows recognition of both at least part of the background image and at least part of the special image (see FIG. 82). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the fragment image for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
The game machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment image in the specific effect can be rotated,
When the first fragment image has the first angle due to the rotating operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image, and
When the first fragment image is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image (see FIGS. 83 and 89).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
The game machine of form 4-3-2 is
In the specific effect, when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images has the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images becomes the second angle (see FIGS. 83 and 89). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 5-1]
The game machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction,
A fragment image displayed in a manner of moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner of moving in a predetermined direction. (See FIGS. 48, 55, 65 and 70),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. Furthermore, since the direction in which the fragment image moves is common between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, but the period required until the fragment image is hidden differs, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if the effect is given, a different impression can be preferably given, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 5-2]
The game machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display is started and the timing before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 77 and 81).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
The game machine of form 5-3 is
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 84). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, and to enhance interest by various ways of showing.

[Form 5-4]
The game machine of form 5-4 is
all of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in the display area of the display means in such a manner that they move toward the outside of the display area (see, for example, FIG. 83(A)),
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific effect is hidden in the display area of the display means in such a manner as to move toward the outside of the display area,
Among the fragment images in the specific effect, the second fragment image different from the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means before moving outside the display area (for example, FIG. 83 (B )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give a difference in how to show the fragment image between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-1]
The game machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part in which an object image is displayed and a crack precursor image of a first crack mode is displayed according to the movement of the object image, and a crack precursor image is displayed in accordance with the movement of the object image. an effect including a second predetermined part in which the mode is changed to the second crack mode, and a third predetermined part in which a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed;
In the specific effect, an object image is displayed, and according to the movement of the object image, a predetermined effect is performed from when the crack portent image of the first crack mode is displayed until the fragment image corresponding to the crack portent image is displayed. It is a production that starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when it is not executed,
The period from when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed until the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect is longer than the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect. long,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means,
In the specific effect, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (Figs. 49 to 51, 59, 60, 66 , see FIG. 67),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. Furthermore, since the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image and the display period of the fragment image are different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the fragment image is also displayed. Even with the effect of displaying an image, it is possible to suitably give a different impression and increase the amusement of the game.

[Form 6-2]
The game machine of form 6-2 is
The execution period of the second predetermined part is longer than that of the first predetermined part (see FIGS. 59, 60, 65 and 70),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the monotonous effect structure.

[Form 6-3]
The game machine of form 6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is continued for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part. can execute the fourth predetermined part displayed by (see FIG. 66),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it can be suitably indicated that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The game machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined production is a production in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
There are a first pattern in which a predetermined effect is executed and decoration identification information is in a ready state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in a ready state,
When the variable display is performed by the first pattern, the degree of expectation that the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher than when the variable display is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 66).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the predetermined effect is executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The game machine of form 6-4-2 is
Both a predetermined effect and a specific effect can be executed in one variable display,
The specific effect can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 33 to 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the third predetermined part in the predetermined effect is executed, thereby enhancing the interest.

[Form 6-5]
The game machine of form 6-5 is
The effect image of the specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when the second predetermined part shifts to the third predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect. ,
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 49(G) and 51(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The game machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined production is a production in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
It is possible to highlight the decoration identification information in the reach state in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decoration identification information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 50(I) to 50(K)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the reach state has occurred.

[Form 6-7-1]
The game machine of form 6-7-1 is
a motion-enhanced image can be displayed corresponding to the motion of the object image in the first predetermined part;
Can be displayed in a display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer,
displaying an action-enhanced image at the timing of starting display of a crack precursor image in a crack mode (see FIG. 49(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the crack portent image can be changed into a crack mode without a sense of discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
The game machine of form 6-7-2 is
It is possible to display a small fragment image together with the display of the motion-enhanced image,
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion-enhanced image (see FIG. 49(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a cracked state.

[Form 6-7-3]
The game machine of form 6-7-3 is
an effect image can be displayed corresponding to the movement of the object image in the second predetermined part;
not displaying the motion-enhanced image when displaying the effect image (see FIGS. 49(H) and 66);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous by providing a difference between the first predetermined part and the second predetermined part.

[Form 6-7-4]
The game machine of form 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to disappear in the display area of the display means differs (Fig. 66).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give a difference in how the fragment images are shown between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-8]
The game machine of form 6-8 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific effect is a non-transparent image that makes it difficult to recognize at least part of the superimposed background image (see FIGS. 59, 60, and 73).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display mode of the fragment image different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
The game machine of form 6-9 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific effect is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 72).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fragment image can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The game machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is the period when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed and is hidden in the display area of the display means. longer than the period required to (see FIGS. 66 and 67),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, and to enhance interest by various ways of showing.

[Form 7-1]
The game machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute an action promoting effect for prompting the player to make an action on the action detecting means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
The action-promoting image can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than the period from when the fracture precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect until the fragment image corresponding to the fracture precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
The action-promoting effect is an effect in which an action-promoting image is displayed for the action valid period, and the display mode of the action-promoting image is changed from the action-promoting mode to the action-completed mode when the action of the player is detected,
when the action promotion image changes from the action promotion mode to the action completion mode by the action promotion presentation, the specific presentation can be executed;
During at least a part of the execution period of the specific effect, both the action promotion image in the action completion mode and the fragment image in the specific effect are visible,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode, and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (Figs. 70),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image and the specific effect of displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby enabling various timings. can give a surprise to the player, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific performance from being lowered due to the monotonous performance structure.

[Form 8-1]
The game machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part displaying a second crack portent image, and a fourth predetermined part displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack portent image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
Before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different,
Before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different (Fig. 45, FIGS. 46, 48, 63 and 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Further, since the type of the background image is different between before and after the fragment image is displayed in common in the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even in the effect in which the fragment image is displayed in the same way A different impression can be suitably given, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 8-2]
The game machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode,
A period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and a period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length of the period is different (see FIGS. 45, 46, 48, 63, and 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 9-1]
The game machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part displaying a second crack portent image, and a fourth predetermined part displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack portent image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The display means can display the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. ,
During the display period of the effect image, it is difficult to see the fragment image over the first period, and it is possible to see the fragment image over the second period after the first period (Fig. 45, FIGS. 46, 48, 63 and 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image, and to preferably execute the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

[Mode 9-2]
The game machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode,
A period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and a period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length of the period is different from the period of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 10-1]
The game machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part displaying a second crack portent image, and a fourth predetermined part displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack portent image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in such a manner that it changes from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (Figs. 45, 46, 53, 54, 63, FIG. 69, and FIG. 72),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, since the moving display speed of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even if the fragment image is similarly displayed, different impressions are suitably given, and the game is played. You can increase your interest.

[Form 10-2]
The game machine of form 10-2 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when shifting from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when shifting from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 45(G) and 53(H)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The game machine of form 10-3-1 is
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a mode of moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and is displayed in a second period from the specific timing to non-display. displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed across
the second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 72),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are different in how the fragment image is displayed, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 10-3-2]
The game machine of form 10-3-2 is
an effect image can be displayed when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 53 and 72),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the specific production from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
The game machine of form 10-4 is
all of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in the display area of the display means in such a manner that they move toward the outside of the display area (see FIG. 83(A));
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means in such a manner as to move toward the outside of the display area;
Of the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, is hidden in the display area of the display means before moving out of the display area (Fig. 83 (B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give a difference in how the fragment image is shown between the first predetermined effect and the second specific effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 10-5]
The game machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized (see FIGS. 59, 60, and 73).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The game machine of form 10-6-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The fragment image displayed moving in the specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to become non-display in the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in the specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See FIGS. 75 and 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-6-2]
The game machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed moving toward a specific direction differs between when the display starts and before it disappears (see FIGS. 75 and 76).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
The game machine of form 10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part can be rotated,
Among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part. more than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image of the image is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 89);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
The game machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotating operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image, and
When the fragment image is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image (see FIGS. 83 and 89).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
The game machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image has the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images has the second angle (see FIGS. 83 and 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image is displayed.

[Form 10-8]
The game machine of form 10-8 is
Both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in one variable display,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information is in the reach state,
When the first predetermined effect is executed before the execution of the second predetermined effect, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 33 to 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the first predetermined effect is executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-9]
The game machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode,
A period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and a period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length of the period is different (see FIGS. 63 and 69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 11-1]
The game machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part displaying a second crack portent image, and a fourth predetermined part displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack portent image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a non-transmissive image in which at least part of the superimposed background image is difficult to recognize,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized (see FIGS. 48, 45, 46, 65, and 63).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Further, since the display modes of the fragment images are different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, even if the fragment images are similarly displayed, different impressions are suitably given, and the amusement of the game is enhanced. can be done.

[Form 12-1]
The game machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part displaying a second crack portent image, and a fourth predetermined part displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack portent image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in such a manner that they move in at least a plurality of directions including a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction,
The fragment image displayed moving in the specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time until it is hidden in the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in the specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See FIGS. 45, 46, 53, 54, 63 and 69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, since the direction in which the fragment image moves is common between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, but the period required until the fragment image is hidden differs, it is preferable even if the fragment image is displayed in the same effect. A different impression can be given and the game interest can be enhanced.

[Form 13-1]
The game machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part for displaying an object image, displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and displaying the crack precursor image according to the movement of the object image. An effect including a second predetermined part for changing from the first crack mode to the second crack mode, and a third predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part in which an object image is displayed and a crack precursor image of a third crack mode is displayed according to the movement of the object image, and the crack precursor image is displayed according to the movement of the object image. and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of corresponding fragment images,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period differs between the first predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when it is not executed,
The period from the start of the second predetermined part to the transition to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth predetermined part to the transition to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means,
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIGS. 45, 46, 49, 50, 66 and 63),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, since the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image and the display period of the fragment image differ between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the fragment image is similarly displayed. Even if it is a performance, it is possible to suitably give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The game machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in the first crack mode according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the third crack pre-stage mode to the third crack mode (see FIGS. 49 and 45).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 14-1]
The game machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect including a third predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a fourth predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect can be executed at a specific timing after executing the first predetermined effect,
The length of the execution period is common between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The length of the execution period is common between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
When the second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (FIG. 42, FIG. 43, see FIG. 61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be continuously executed, so that the player can be continuously given a surprise, and furthermore, Since the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is hidden, a new crack precursor image is displayed even though the fragment image is already displayed. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the production effect.

[Form 14-2]
The game machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The display start position of the fragment image differs between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 42, 43, and 84),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a difference in how the fragment image is shown between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
The game machine of form 14-3 is
A special image can be displayed in common with the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in the first mode,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (see FIGS. 42(F) and 43(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are different in how the special image is displayed, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 14-4]
The game machine of form 14-4 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part differ in the length of the display period of the fragment image, while the length of the display period of the special image is common (see FIG. 61).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a difference in how the fragment image is shown between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-5]
The game machine of form 14-5 is
There are a first pattern in which a second predetermined effect is executed after execution of a first predetermined effect and a second pattern in which a second predetermined effect is not executed after execution of the first predetermined effect,
When the game progresses according to the first pattern, the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the second predetermined effect is executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-6]
The game machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 72).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the relevance between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
The game machine of form 14-7-1 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 42(C), 43(C), and 61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relevance between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
The game machine of form 14-7-2 is
The length of the display period is common between the effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing (see FIG. 61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
The game machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect, a crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period until it is hidden in the display area of the display means,
It takes a second period different from the first period until the fragment image is not displayed in the display area of the display means when it is notified by the notification effect that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state (Figs. 45, 46, 58, FIG. 63, and FIG. 71 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image, it is possible to surprise the player. By displaying the fracture sign image together with the image of the fragment that requires a different period of time, it is possible to inform the player that the control will not be appropriately performed in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The game machine of form 15-2 is
The display period of the fracture precursor image when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state is longer than the fracture precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 63).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that the control is not in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The game machine of form 15-3 is
There is a first fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part,
There is a second fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state,
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (see, for example, FIG. 46(J) and FIG. 58(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in appearance and to enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
The game machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized,
The fragment image when it is notified that it is not controlled in an advantageous state is a transparent image that allows at least part of the superimposed background image to be recognized (see FIG. 73).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the fragment images different appearances and enhance interest.

[Form 15-5]
The game machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction ( For example, see FIGS. 75 and 77),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to add relevance to how the fragment image is displayed and enhance interest.

[Form 15-6]
The game machine of form 15-6 is
In the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state, the specified A color effect image can be displayed,
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 45(G) and 58(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different and enhance interest.

[Form 16-1]
The game machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect, it is possible to display a crack precursor image of the second crack mode,
When the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the first light emission pattern,
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the second light emission pattern,
The light emission of the light emission means by the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed,
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification effect in which it is notified that the control will not be in an advantageous state is completed (Figs. 45, 46, 58, 63, 71(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute the predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, and furthermore, the break precursor image and the notification effect are continued until a predetermined condition is established after the end of the break precursor image and the notification effect. By using the second light emission pattern, it is possible to notify the player that the control is not appropriately performed to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The game machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect, it is possible to display a crack precursor image of the second crack mode,
Before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image is different (FIGS. 45(A) to 45(F), FIG. 46(I) ~ see Figure 46 (K)),
The display mode of the background image is different before it is notified whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect, and when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (Fig. 58(A), FIG. 58(B), FIG. 58(D), FIG. 63, and FIG. 71(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give surprise to the player by being able to execute the predetermined effect of displaying the image that predicts a breakage, and furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not the image that predicts a breakage is used and is controlled to be in an advantageous state. By changing the display mode of the background image before being notified, it is possible to notify the player that the control will not be appropriately advantageous.

[Form 18-1]
The game machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images,
The second predetermined effect includes displaying a fourth predetermined part displaying a second crack precursor image, a fifth predetermined part starting the first movement of the movable body, and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor images. and a sixth predetermined part,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 45, 46, 48, 63 and 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, by displaying the fragment image by operating the movable body after displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful presentation can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
The game machine of form 18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode,
A period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and a period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length of the period is different (see FIGS. 63 and 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 18-3-1]
The game machine of form 18-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is displayed in common at the first timing when shifting from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when shifting from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part. is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 45(G) and 48(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different and enhance interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The game machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
Display of the effect image starts when the movable body is placed at the advanced position (see FIG. 48(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
The game machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first action of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first action of the movable body (see FIG. 65),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The game machine of form 18-4 is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that is different from the second predetermined effect and suggests that the movable body is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
A movable body emphasized image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed with the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed with the first motion of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 65).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
The game machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images,
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part in which a second crack precursor image is displayed along with the first motion of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part in which a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor images are displayed. It is a production that includes
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends before the fragment image disappears in the display area of the display means. (see FIGS. 45, 46, 56, 57, 63, and 71(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, by operating the movable body and displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful presentation can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The game machine of form 19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed by changing from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode,
A period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and a period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length of the period is different (see FIGS. 63 and 71),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 19-3-1]
The game machine of form 19-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is displayed in common at the first timing when shifting from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when shifting from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part. is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 45(G) and 56(E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different from the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The game machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
Display of the effect image is started when the second action is started (see FIG. 56(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
The game machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second action of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second action of the movable body (see FIG. 71),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The game machine of form 19-4 is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that is different from the second predetermined effect and suggests that the movable body is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
A movable body emphasized image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed with the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed with the first motion of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 71),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
The game machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
In the first predetermined effect, a first predetermined part displaying an object image, a second predetermined part displaying a crack precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor images are displayed. and a third predetermined part,
In the specific effect, a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when the crack precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect to when the fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in accordance with the first action of the movable body. It is a production that starts the display of
The execution timing differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect,
In the specific effect, the movable body can perform a second action different from the first action, and the movable body starts the second action after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 45, 46, 52, 63 and 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. By operating the movable body and displaying the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful presentation can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The game machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
Display of the effect image is started when the first action is started (see FIG. 52(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity can be created and the effect of the specific presentation can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
The game machine of form 20-2-2 is
The effect image can be displayed over a display period including a first display period and a second display period,
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially common,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is longer than the period of the first action of the movable body (see FIG. 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
The game machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the movable body is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
A movable body emphasized image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed with the action of the movable body in the suggestive effect, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed with the first action of the movable body in the specific effect (see FIG. 68),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the specific production from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
The game machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is a effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
The second predetermined effect is a effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the second crack mode,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
Even if the crack precursor image of the first crack mode or the second crack mode is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode or the second crack mode is not displayed is displayed with the first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and the predetermined range and is displayed with the first visibility over different specific ranges (see FIGS. 45(E), (F), 47(C), 63, 64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying crack portent images of different crack modes can be executed at different timings, thereby giving surprise to the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image visible together with the crack precursor image differs depending on the type of crack mode, even if the crack precursor image is similarly displayed, a different impression is preferably given, and the game can be played. You can increase your interest.

[Form 21-2]
The game machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher in visibility than the first visibility and the second visibility (see FIG. 47(C) enlarged view),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The game machine of form 21-3 is
A corresponding image corresponding to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
When the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed on the predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on the specific range (see FIG. 47(C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be preferably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 21-4]
The game machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image of the first crack mode (see FIG. 64).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are different in how the crack precursor image is displayed, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 22-1]
The game machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is a effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
The second predetermined effect is a effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the second crack mode,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The visibility of the background image differs between when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed,
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is longer than that of the crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images of the second crack mode,
The degree of expectation for control to be in an advantageous state is higher when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode of the second type is displayed than when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode of the first type is displayed. high (see FIGS. 44-46, 62 and 63),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying crack precursor images of different crack modes can be executed at different timings, respectively, thereby giving surprise to the player at various timings. Furthermore, the player will pay attention to the type of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode, and even if the effect of displaying the crack precursor image is similarly given, a different impression is suitably given, and the game interest is increased. can increase

[Form 22-2]
The game machine of form 22-2 is
A background that is displayed below a predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first type and the second crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode and the second type is displayed. The visibility of the images is different (see FIGS. 45 and 44),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the crack precursor image look different and to enhance interest.

[Form 22-3]
The game machine of form 22-3 is
an effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common for the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect;
The display pattern of the effect image differs between the first predetermined effect and the second timing predetermined effect (see FIGS. 45 and 44),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display pattern of the effect image different and enhance interest.

[Form 23-1]
The game machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
capable of executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding image corresponding to the variable display,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect,
The display means
A corresponding image corresponding to variable display can be displayed on the special display layer,
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed in a second predetermined display layer having a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined effect is a effect of displaying the first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is a effect of displaying a second crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image is reduced,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined production is executed, the change production is not executed,
A change effect can be executed when the second predetermined effect is executed (see FIGS. 45 to 47, 63, 64, and 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect of displaying the first fracture precursor image and the second predetermined effect of displaying the second fracture precursor image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the game can be played at various timings. Furthermore, even in the performance of displaying the crack precursor image, the display layer and the presence or absence of the change performance are different, so that different impressions are preferably given and the interest in the game is enhanced. be able to.

[Form 23-2-1]
The game machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change effect is a effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed and the display mode of the corresponding display is changed by performing an action in which the predetermined object image acts on the corresponding display,
The predetermined object image can be displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 91).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 23-2-2]
The game machine of form 23-2-2 is
A change-emphasized image can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer, corresponding to the action of the predetermined object image (see FIG. 91).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute the change effect even during the execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-1]
The game machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a first predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
A special effect can be executed after execution of the second predetermined effect,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the first crack mode and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of the second crack mode and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect,
The display mode is different between the fragment image in the first predetermined effect and the fragment image in the second predetermined effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestive image suggesting that the special effect will be executed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined effect is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined effect (see FIGS. 45, 63, 68, 92 and 93),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect of displaying the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various timings. Furthermore, the display mode of the fragment image differs between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, and the relevance between the fragment image in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter can be enhanced. Even if the fragment image is displayed on the screen, a different impression can be suitably given, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 24-2]
The game machine of form 24-2 is
The special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect,
When the second special performance is executed, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the first special performance is executed,
The suggestive modes include a first suggestive mode suggesting that the first special effect will be executed, and a second suggestive mode suggesting that the second special effect will be executed (FIGS. 92, 93, FIG. 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-1]
The game machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible,
Fragment images in transparent mode are displayed more than fragment images in suggested mode (see FIG. 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-2]
The game machine of form 24-3-2 is
The fragment image can be rotated,
In the second predetermined effect, the fragment image in the transparent mode has a greater amount of rotational movement than the fragment image in the suggestive mode (see FIG. 94).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-4]
The game machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of suggested mode fragment images are displayed, and a plurality of transparent mode fragment images are displayed,
In the second predetermined part, a single suggested fragment image is displayed and a plurality of transparent fragment images are displayed (see FIG. 93).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined effect is executed, the preceding stage effect (Fig. 52 (C)) can be executed,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the broken image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 80(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 80(B1)). It is a production that includes
The execution period of the preceding stage effect is longer than the display period of the split image in the first mode (see FIGS. 68 and 80),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a suitable crack pattern can be realized by creating a reserve for cracks in the front-stage presentation and giving a sense of speed to the cracked image of the first mode.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined effect is executed, the preceding stage effect (Fig. 52 (C)) can be executed,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the broken image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 80(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 80(B1)). It is a production that includes
The sum of the period during which the split image is displayed in the first mode and the period during which the split image is displayed in the second mode is longer than the period during which the preceding stage effect is executed (see FIGS. 68 and 80).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the period during which the split image is in the first mode and the second mode longer than the execution period of the pre-stage effect, the split pattern is impressed.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
The effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A split image can be displayed in a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
At least part of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the split image overlap,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the display period of the broken image,
It is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the cracked image over the second period after the first period,
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 61 to 71 and 75 to 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image has the role of hiding the first display portion of the split image, and while fulfilling its role, it prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the split image.

[Form 28]
The game machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means
The effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A split image can be displayed in a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is a effect including changing the split image from the first mode to the second mode after displaying the split image in the first mode,
The display means displays the effect image when displaying the split image of the first mode, and hides the effect image before displaying the split image of the second mode (FIGS. 61 to 71, 75 to 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the split image from giving a sense of incongruity by hiding the first display portion of the split image with the effect image.

[Form 29]
The game machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the split image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 79(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the split image in the first mode (FIG. 79(B1)). It is a production that includes
The transmittance of the split image of the second mode differs between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the split image of the second mode (see FIGS. 67 and 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect when the split image of the second aspect is displayed.

[Mode 30]
The game machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the broken image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 75(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 75(B1)). It is a production that includes
The specific effect is to change the broken image from the third mode to the fourth mode (FIGS. 79(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the third mode (FIG. 79(B1)). It is a production that includes
Transmittance differs between the split image at a predetermined timing after the display of the split image of the second mode is started and the split image at a specific timing after the display of the split image of the fourth mode is started ( 63, 67, 75, 79, and 83 (A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the split image of the second aspect is displayed and when the split image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Mode 31]
The game machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed in the normal state, and after displaying the split image in the first mode (FIG. 75(B1)), the split image is changed from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 75(B1)). 75 (B2) ~ (B5)) is a production that includes
The specific effect is a effect that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a production that includes changing the mode (FIGS. 79 (B2) to (B5)),
Transmittance differs between the split image at a predetermined timing after the display of the split image of the second mode and the split image at a specific timing after the display of the split image of the fourth mode is started ( 30 to 32, 63, 67, 75, 79, and 83 (A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the split image of the second aspect is displayed and when the split image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Mode 32]
The game machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
A background image can be displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
controlling light emission of the light emitting means using the specific luminance data table when the split image is displayed;
Light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific luminance data table until a specific timing in the display period of the split image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the luminance data table corresponding to the background image (Fig. 61 to 63 and 66),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform light emission control of the light emitting means when the split image is displayed.

[Mode 33]
The game machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
The effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A split image can be displayed in a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
At least part of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the split image overlap,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the split image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 61 to 67),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the split image is displayed.

[Mode 34]
The game machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 61), and outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the second pattern. not output sound corresponding to the image (see FIG. 68);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a split image can be displayed by a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Mode 35]
The game machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 61), while the sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the second pattern. Outputs a sound that informs that it is controlled by (see FIG. 71),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, split images can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions according to the game state.

[Mode 36]
The game machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 61), and outputs a sound corresponding to the split image when the split image is displayed according to the second pattern. not output sound corresponding to the image (see FIG. 68);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a split image can be displayed by a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Mode 37]
The game machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
sound output means
A predetermined sound can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
A specific sound can be output when a broken image is displayed,
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound that is louder than a predetermined sound (see FIG. 88).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to distinguish between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the crack image is displayed, and to preferably give an impression when the crack image is displayed.

[Mode 38]
The game machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a sound output means,
The display means
The object image can be displayed on the special display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The crack precursor image can be displayed in conjunction with the movement display of the object image,
sound output means
A sound corresponding to the object image can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
When a split image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the split image can be output (see FIG. 88),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to distinguish between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the crack image is displayed, and to preferably give an impression when the crack image is displayed.

[Mode 39]
The game machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
In the first pattern, the movement speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size, which is smaller than the first size, are different because the amount of variation is a specific value,
In the second pattern, since the variation amount is 0, the moving speed of the fragment image of the third size in the second pattern and the fragment image of the fourth size smaller than the third size are common ( 73 and 74),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first pattern is affected by animation differently depending on the size, and the small fragment image flies quickly, and the large fragment image becomes a crack pattern in which it falls slightly slowly and immediately, showing realistic movement. The second pattern, regardless of size, is affected by animation in the same way as it flies and falls in the same way. can be done.

[Form 40]
The game machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The fragment image is displayed in a manner of falling after the display is started,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
Since the setting of the gravity value is different between the first pattern and the second pattern, the falling speed of the fragment image is different (see FIGS. 73 and 74).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the value of the parameter and varying the speed at which the fragment image falls, it is possible to construct various patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Mode 41]
The game machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
Since the setting of the direction of gravity is different between the first pattern and the second pattern, the moving direction of the fragment image when displayed is different (see FIGS. 73 and 74).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the direction in which the fragment image advances, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form 42]
The game machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
The first pattern includes a first parameter for displaying the fragment image and a second parameter for displaying the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter (see FIGS. 73 and 74),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed, and a common part is created for the fragment image, while the value of the second parameter is different to construct a variety of patterns. A display pattern of a fragment image can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The game machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
The first pattern includes a first parameter for displaying the fragment image and a second parameter for displaying the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter,
The second pattern and the third pattern have different values of the first parameter and the same value of the second parameter (see FIGS. 73 and 74).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to construct a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image by configuring each pattern with different parameter values while creating a common portion for the fragment image. .

[Form 44]
The game machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The split image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
Before the split image is displayed by the first pattern and after the split image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different,
Before the split image is displayed by the second pattern and after the split image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different ( 30, 32, 45 to 47),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give different impressions when displaying the broken image in the normal state and when displaying the broken image in the special state, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 45]
The game machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means
The effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A split image can be displayed in a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is a effect including changing the split image from the first mode to the second mode after displaying the split image in the first mode,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state more advantageous than the normal state,
The effect image is displayed when the split image of the first mode is displayed, and the effect image is hidden before the split image of the second mode is displayed (Figs. 46),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the split image from giving a sense of incongruity by hiding the first display portion of the split image with the effect image.

[Form 46]
The game machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The split image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The split image displayed according to the first pattern and the split image displayed according to the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The broken image displayed by the first pattern and the broken image displayed by the second pattern differ in moving speed (see FIGS. 30, 32, and 45 to 47),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of split images that does not break the tempo of the special state can enhance the presentation effect during the special state.

[Form 47]
The game machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The split image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when the divided image is displayed by the first pattern differs from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when the divided image is displayed by the second pattern (FIG. 27, 29(C), 30 and 32),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs according to the display pattern of the split image, it is possible to draw more attention to the display pattern of the split image.

[Form 48]
The game machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A plurality of fragment images of the first type can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
a plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer;
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
the display period of the fragment image of the first type and the display period of the fragment image of the second type overlap at least partially;
The first type of fragment image is a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is a transparent mode that allows at least part of the background image displayed in the display layer lower than the specific display layer to be recognized (see FIGS. 80 and 94).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images with different display modes, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 49]
The game machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A plurality of fragment images of the first type can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
a plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer;
special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
the display period of the fragment image of the first type and the display period of the fragment image of the second type overlap at least partially;
The display mode is different between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image,
The display period of the fragment image of the first type is longer than the display period of the fragment image of the second type (see FIGS. 80 and 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images with different display modes, it is possible to provide an impressive presentation.

[Form 50]
The game machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
a display means;
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing on the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The display amount of the fragment image displayed in the first region, which is the display region where the movable body is not superimposed, is larger than that of the fragment image displayed in the second region, which is the display region where the movable body is superimposed (Fig. 80, See Figure 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragments can be preferably displayed while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means.

[Mode 51]
The game machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
a display means;
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing on the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
A first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner as to move from a first region, which is a display region in which the movable body is not superimposed, to a second region, which is a display region in which the movable body is superimposed. ,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in a manner of moving the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 80 and 94).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a fragment image that does not enter the area where the movable body is superimposed makes it possible to recognize that it has been broken, and a fragment image that passes through the area where the movable body is superimposed is prepared to prevent the moving object from moving. It is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Mode 52]
The game machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a movable body;
a display means;
The display means
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing on the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position not superimposed on the display area, the fragment image is continuously displayed (see FIGS. 80 and 94).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the movable body is superimposed on the display area of the display means, it is possible to suitably display the fragment image so as not to overlook the fragment image.

[Mode 53]
The game machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
and a production execution means,
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means
A crack sign image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than a predetermined display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is a effect including a first predetermined part for displaying a crack precursor image and a second predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images of the first type corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of fragment images of the second type when the crack precursor image is displayed,
The second type of fragment image takes a shorter period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 49 and 50).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of displaying the fragment image.

[Mode 54]
The game machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer,
A broken image can be displayed in a specific display layer with a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The first pattern is a pattern for displaying a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern for displaying a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
Before the first type of split image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of split image is displayed by the first pattern, the display layer is displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer. Different types of background images are used,
Before the second type of split image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of split image is displayed by the second pattern, the display layer is displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer. different types of background images (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific character appears in common with the display patterns of the plurality of split images, the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Mode 55]
The game machine of form 55 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
The effect image can be displayed on the first display layer,
A split image can be displayed in a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed in a third display layer having a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a fourth display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The first pattern is a pattern for displaying a first type of cracked image when the specific character moves,
The second pattern is a pattern for displaying a split image of the second type when the specific character moves,
The display means
When the first type of broken image is displayed according to the first pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a predetermined timing after the first type of broken image is displayed. display and
When displaying the split image of the second type according to the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a specific timing after the split image of the second type is displayed. Display (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the split image from giving a sense of incongruity by hiding the first display portion of the split image with the effect image.

[Mode 56]
The game machine of form 56 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer with a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the fragment image,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of fragment images of the second type are displayed in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner of moving from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 51).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to change the moving speed of the fragment image according to the type of display pattern of the fragment image, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
The game machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
comprising display means,
The display means
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer,
A broken image can be displayed in a specific display layer with a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information about variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns of the split image,
The first pattern is a pattern for displaying a first type of cracked image in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern for displaying a second type of cracked image in conjunction with the action of the specific character,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs between when the broken image is displayed by the first pattern and when the broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 45, 46, 49, and 50). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the sense of anticipation for the specific character is heightened, and interest is enhanced by drawing attention to the display pattern of the split image after the specific character is displayed.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization is also generically called simply variable display.

In addition, on the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a decoration A display area 5S for displaying a small pattern corresponding to the pattern is provided, and the small pattern is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small pattern, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the right hitting operation that prompts the player to perform the right hitting operation. The notification image, the remaining time saving display indicating the number of remaining time saving, etc. are displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the effect image (object image) such as the character, so that the effect image overlaps and is stored in the first reserved memory. While preventing the visibility of the number, the second reserved memory number, the small pattern and the error display from decreasing, the decorative pattern is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the effect image, so that the decoration It may be possible to prevent the visibility of the effect image from deteriorating due to the overlap of the symbols.

Incidentally, the small pattern is also referred to as a fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are displayed variably, for example, in a display device such as the image display device 5. The display changes depending on the movement. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is entirely or partially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U , an active display area 5F). Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In addition, in the present embodiment, the common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but represents a variable display in which the execution of the first special symbol is suspended. A first special figure pending storage display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending storage display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which the execution of the second special symbol is suspended is displayed. , may be provided separately. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation storage display area 5U is a display area that displays a reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is a normal state, and the game state is a time saving state or a probability change In the case of the state, it is a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state, and displays the second special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. This is the display area that displays the active display.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, thereby causing the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start winning opening) by tilting the movable piece when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It is said that the mouth is open.) When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Below the board 2, a button lamp 9e is provided. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b and the button lamp 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also called "frame lamps".

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Also, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decoration lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps". The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the button lamp 9e, and the decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the button lamp 9e, and the decoration lamp 9f include LEDs (see FIG. 36). Further, various lamps will be described later.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 from the. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and a real-time clock 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 outputs a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

The payout control board 006SG030 has a payout circuit driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of the payout signal. The device 006SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 according to the mode of the game ball detection signal.

Also, the payout control board 006SG030 has a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the batting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls a launcher 006SG033 capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2 . In addition, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 006SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that the game ball has been shot by the shooting device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . It also performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. As a result, drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging an image of each layer and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. and a display image creation area are arranged. In addition, each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower. The lower the display priority in the image display device 5, the lower.

As shown in FIG. 4, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as a layer 1 image, and a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as a layer 2 image. , a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as a layer 3 image, and a layer 4 image for drawing and arranging a later-described crack sign image (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as a layer 4 image. For drawing and arranging a glass plate image 006SG301A as an image to be broken, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a fragment image 006SG302 generated by breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image of layer 5 in the image drawing area. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image to be described later as a layer 6 image, and a layer 7 image for drawing and arranging a white-out image 006SG303 to be described later as a layer 7 image. An image drawing area, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompting image, which will be described later, as a layer 8 image, and a layer 9 image for drawing and arranging variable display compatible display (suspended display and active display) A layer 9 image drawing area, a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern) as a layer 10 image, a first reserved memory number, a second reserved memory number, and a right hitting notification image are arranged. ing. Also, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and arranged in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that the display area of the image display device 5 is cracked by the action of the character or the movable body 32. , the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and arranged in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that the display area of the image display device 5 is broken. The fragment image 006SG302 is an image in which a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed and displayed in order to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken by the action of the character or the movable body 32. be.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, which will be described later. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and break effect start timing (break time of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the result notification effect. In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301A has a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous cracking effect, a dialog announcement effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo-continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect, which will be described later. It is also an image (crack target image) displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing of the crack effect (the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, At the start timing of the breaking effect in the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, switching between the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A cannot be visually recognized by the player due to the display of the white-out image 006SG303. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 on which the crack is displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without being noticed by the player. A crack (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302) can be realized, and it is possible to strongly impress the player with the crack effect.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area to the layer 10 image drawing area. . Also, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the layer 1 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the display priority of the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. An image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a higher display priority than an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area. The image drawn in the 7 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. An image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area has a higher display priority than an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. An image drawn in the image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than an image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. When a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, an image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than an image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

That is, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed in the lowest layer in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed (prioritized) above the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5. The image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is displayed (prioritized display) in the image display device 5 in a higher layer than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (prioritized display). the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image displayed (prioritized display) in the image display device 5 above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, The image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (prioritized display) than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and is drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image display device 5 is the image displayed (prioritized display) over the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is the image displayed on the image display device 5. 5 is displayed (prioritized) above the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5 . , and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. This is an image displayed in the upper layer (prioritized display). Further, when the layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5 in a higher layer than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area. It is an image (displayed preferentially). Also, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, instead of the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background described later can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be drawn. , In the layer 1-3 image drawing area, a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), which will be described later, can be drawn, and drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is the layer 1-3 image. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image.

In the present embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) in order to make the overlapping portion of the upper layer image invisible to the player when superimposed on the lower layer image. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn/arranged in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 6A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 6B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 9000H is a power-on specifying command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold-started (that the power has been turned on while the clear switch 92 is being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to a state in which various processes of the gaming machine can be executed after initializing the data without restoring the data before the power is turned on when the power is turned on. . The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates that the pachinko gaming machine has hot-started (that the power was turned on while the clear switch 92 was not pressed (power-on without initialization)). It should be noted that "hot start" refers to a state in which various processes of the gaming machine can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. The second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability variation control is not performed while command 9502H is a game state in which time saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high Base state, variable probability state) corresponding to the third game state designation command. In addition, the high probability high base state may simply be referred to as "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a win start specifying command (also called a "fanfare command") specifying display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big win game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "0" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH indicates the result of determining whether the random number value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)" as a result of determination at the time of winning. It is a variable category command.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 6A are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be replaced by different commands. You can add different commands from For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the notification command of passing, and the remaining variable display frequency by which probability variation control and time saving control are performed.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 7, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as the display result determination table, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), random for special figure display result judgment A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to a special figure display result of "big win" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table 22, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "big hit" assigned to display results. As a result, when the pachinko play rr is in the time saving state (low probability state), the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is determined (in the present embodiment, about 1/300). Therefore, if the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state, the probability of being determined increases (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state, based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C" that shifts to a high probability high base state, and only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to a low probability high base state " Non-probability variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal opening big-hit in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state by the ``non-probable variable jackpot'' is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

The variable probability control and the time saving control, which are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win A to the variable probability big win C, are ended on the condition that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. In addition, the time saving control started after the end of the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state by the end of the variable display of 100 times or by the end of the variable display of the 100 times. terminated on the condition that Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is one of the variable probability big win A to variable probability big win C, the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state passes through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously without In other words, the variable probability state in the present embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a big hit regardless of the number of variable display times, while the time saving state in the present embodiment is a game state in which the variable display result does not become a big hit. If not, it is a game state controlled to a normal state by executing variable display 100 times. For this reason, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9 (A), depending on whether the special figure displayed variably is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" are assigned different determination values for the jackpot types. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a big hit state with a small number of rounds as "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by the high opening control, the frequent occurrence of a big win state with few winning balls is avoided and the interest in the game is reduced. It is designed to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A), whether the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the first special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-probable jackpot or a definite jackpot, it is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. ing.

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIGS. 10A and 10B show variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal state (low probability low base state) and time saving state or probability variable state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), respectively variable display results corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the case where the variable display result is "big hit" A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to . In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low-probability-low base state), as a super reach variation pattern, a pseudo-continuous effect including a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbol during variable display is executed once. After that, the reach effect of super reach α is executed via normal reach, and the variable display result is a loss or a big hit Variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2), pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, via normal reach Then, the reach performance of super reach β is executed, and the variable display result is a loss or a big hit. Variation patterns (PA2-3, PB1-3), the reach of normal reach and super reach α after the pseudo continuous performance is executed twice. A ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win β is executed via the effect, and variation patterns (PA2-4, PB1-4) are provided in which the variable display result is a loss or a big hit. The ready-to-reach effect of super reach α in the present embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach effect described later, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and the strong S reach effect B to be described later. .

In addition, if the game state is a time saving state or a probability variable state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), as a super reach fluctuation pattern, reach production of super reach γ is executed via normal reach Variation patterns (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a loss or a big hit, and a variation pattern (PA2- 7, PB1-7) are provided. The ready-to-reach effect of super reach γ in the present embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach effect described later, and the ready-to-reach effect of super reach δ corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and the strong S reach effect B to be described later. .

As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. , For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern, and then the A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a variation pattern according to this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game state, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11(A) to 11(D), when the game state is normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is lost, the special symbol that executes the variable display is reserved. If the number of memories (the number of reserved memories of the same type) is 1 or less, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and the value of the random number MR3, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is If the number is 2, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination table B for loss and the value of the random number MR3, and if the number of reserved and stored special symbols for executing variable display is 3, the variation pattern for loss. A variation pattern is determined based on the determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Further, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state (high base state) and the variable display result is loss, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination table D for loss and the random number MR3. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11(E) and 11(F), when the game state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a big win, the big win variation pattern determination table A and the random number MR3 A variation pattern is determined based on the value, and when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) and the variable display result is a big win, the variation is based on the big win variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3. determine the pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is not shortened. Determine the variation pattern (PA1-1), and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, determine the variation pattern (PA2-1) that is out of normal reach, and the value of the random value MR3 is 901 If it is within the range of ~970, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is lost via the normal reach after executing the pseudo continuous effect once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971. If it is within the range of ~990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that becomes super reach β deviation via normal reach, and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, change The pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach β is lost via the normal reach and the super reach α after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11(B), when the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the fluctuation pattern is shortened. (PA1-2) is determined, and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-1) that is out of normal reach, and the value of the random value MR3 is 901 to 970 If it is within the range, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is lost via the normal reach after executing the pseudo continuous effect once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If it is within the range of , the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-3) that becomes a deviation of super reach β via normal reach, and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern , a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach β is lost via the normal reach and the super reach α after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11(C), when the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is shortened. (PA1-3), and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-1) that is out of normal reach, and the value of the random value MR3 is 901 to 970 If it is within the range, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is lost via the normal reach after executing the pseudo continuous effect once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If it is within the range of , the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-3) that becomes a deviation of super reach β via normal reach, and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the variation pattern , a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the super reach β is lost via the normal reach and the super reach α after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11(D), when the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the fluctuation pattern is short non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4) is determined, and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-5), and the value of the random value MR3 is 551 to If it is within the range of 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern. (PA2-5), and if the value of the random value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-6) in which the super reach γ is shifted via the normal reach, If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern (PA2-7) is determined as the variation pattern in which the super reach δ is lost via the normal reach.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11 (E), when the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is the normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1 -1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the variation pattern is the variation pattern (PB1) that becomes the super reach α jackpot via the normal reach after the pseudo continuous performance is executed once. -2), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PB1-3) that becomes a super reach β jackpot via normal reach, and the random value If the value of MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PB1-4) that becomes a super reach β jackpot via normal reach and super reach α after the pseudo-continuous performance is executed twice. do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11 (F), when the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is a non-reach big hit variation pattern ( PB1-5) is determined, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern (PB1-6) that becomes a super reach γ jackpot via normal reach, and random If the value of the numerical value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the variation pattern (PB1-7) is determined to be a super reach δ jackpot via normal reach.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the decision ratio of a plurality of variation patterns for big wins may be varied according to the type of big wins. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which variable display of the variation pattern resulted in a big hit, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. there is The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. It has a control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) are stored in order of winning.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 4B) are stored in the order of winning.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment is held data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data representing the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on is reserved data. It stores until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 006SG151A and the second special figure suspension storage unit 006SG151B in this way can be used to execute a special figure game using the first special figure or a special figure game using the second special figure. It shows that it is suspended, and it becomes suspension information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in these special figure games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole in this way, and the second starting winning hole When the holding information (second holding information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) is stored in association with the holding number in a separate holding storage unit, The variable display based on the second reserved storage information is preferentially executed over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 006SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 006SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A performance control pattern table storing a plurality of types of performance control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a production control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 13A includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. there is

The effect control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 006SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the reception command buffer 006SG194A at the time of start winning as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 006SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, the start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (second 1 reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), pattern designation command, variation category command, four commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are these starting opening winning designation command, reservation storage number notification command, symbol designation command , A storage area (entry) for storing the variable category command in association with the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory separately is ensured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in the present embodiment, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a continuous cracking effect to be described later. Each storage area (entry ).

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending display when execution of the pending display effect is not determined in the pending display effect determination process to be described later. When the execution of the effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇ )) or “2” (star (☆)) is set. After the execution of the pending display effect determination process, a pending display update process, which will be described later, is further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are displayed according to the respective pending display flags (for example, the value of the pending display flag is If the value of the pending display flag is "0", a white circle (○) is displayed, if the value of the pending display flag is "1", a square (◇) is displayed, and if the value of the pending display flag is "2", a star (☆) is displayed. Further, the value of the continuous crack effect flag is set in the continuous crack effect setting process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, a starting opening winning designation command, a pending memory number notification command, a design designation command, and a variation category command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting opening winning designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "0" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage , pending memory count notification command, design designation command, and variable category command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 13(B) is an entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. , and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 13(B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number "0" is deleted. ' are shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "0". , the commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the restoration process (step S4) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the restoration condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after the initialization process (step S6). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 15 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game using the second special is preferentially executed over the special game using the first special. ). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes a process to measure . Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big win opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (006SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (006SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 006SG154, it should be able to specify the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 006SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (006SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (006SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (006SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 006SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (006SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start buffer value is "0", 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the start buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern and the random number MR3 for judging the variation pattern are extracted (006SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (006SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning (step 006SGS112), for example, stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 into the buffer specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. By storing in the area or the like, setting for transmitting the reservation storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (006SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 006SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "0" (Y at 006SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 006SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (006SGS116), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Random value determination process when winning a prize)
FIG. 18(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 006 SGS112 of FIG. 17 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic part 006SG, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled as "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing to be described later to the big hit game state. A determination is made as to whether or not to Further, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 006SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. to specify the current gaming state (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It should just specify that it is a normal state (low fixed base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 006SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 006SGS109 of FIG. 17 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is not within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (step 006SGS123; N), the variable display result is "missing". Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command (step 006 SGS128), and whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state It is determined whether or not there is (step 006SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for loss Table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation variation pattern determination table B and the deviation variation pattern determination table C are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. A judgment value from 1 to 660 is assigned within the range that the random number MR3 can take, and in the fluctuation pattern judgment tables B and C for loss, the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Judgment values of 1 to 700 and 1 to 750 are assigned to each possible range. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, in step 006SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending storage changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for type determination (step 006 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C is the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-big hit, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command is executed (step 006SGS133), and as a table for judging the big hit variation pattern, the big hit variation according to the game state A pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the processing of step 006SGS135, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the game state is a time saving state or a probability variation state (low probability high base state or high If it is a certain high base state), the big hit variation pattern determination table B may be set.

In the process of step 006SGS138, using each variation pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random number MR3 is determined (step 006SGS138). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, at least when the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved memories. A category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "others" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and a random value is provided. It suffices if it can be determined based on MR3 whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 006SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 16 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 006SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 006SGS141; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the second special figure pending storage unit Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 006 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, subtract 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006 SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), it moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, at step 006SGS141, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. Thus, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 006SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "0" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 006 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006 SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 006SGS148), it moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006 SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8 is selected as a table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit" or a "lose". to set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or "loss" (step 006SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (probability variation state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variable flag is off low probability state (low probability low base state and low probability high base state in the case of this embodiment), the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is 1 to 219 If it falls within the range, it is determined as a "big hit", and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined as a "loss".

In this way, in the display result determination table selected at step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big win" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so step 006SGS150 In the processing, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high-probability state, different determination data (determination value) is used to determine the special figure display result as a "big hit" By determining whether or not, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) as a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

If it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 006SGS150 (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 006 SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (Step 006 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 006 SGS154, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed is changed to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state ( Which game state is to be controlled from among the high-probability-high base state) is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006 SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "0". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3". After the processing of step 006SGS155, the process proceeds to step 006SGS156.

Further, when it is determined to be "missed" at step 006SGS150 (step 006SGS150; N), the processing of step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processing of steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006 SGS156, the CPU 103 corresponds to the pre-determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. , Set a fixed special pattern. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 006SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 006SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 006SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 16 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is lost, if the game state is the normal state and the number of pending memories of the special symbols for executing the variable display is 1, the variation pattern determination table A for losing is selected, and the game state is normal. If the state and the reserved memory number of the special symbols for executing the variable display are 2, the variation pattern determination table B for losing is selected, and the game state is the normal state and the reserved memory number for the special symbols for executing the variable display is 3. If it is one, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and if the game state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is selected. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, if the game state is a normal state, the big win variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time saving state or a probability variable state, the big win variation pattern determination table B is selected. do.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation, etc., by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected (set), multiple types of variation patterns (Step 006SGS162).

After determining the variation pattern in step 006SGS162, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start any one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 006SGS163, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (step 006SGS164). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the notification command of the number of second reserved storage, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, the special figure variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. In addition, the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. , the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 16 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S113 to end the variation of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184). , a winning start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a winning start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a winning start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the types of jackpots stored in the performance control board 12; The setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (step 006 SGS187). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability variable jackpot or probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on in step 006SGS191 (step 006SGS191). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), check whether the value of the time saving counter is "0". judge. When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS192; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 006 SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS194), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 006SGS195), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time saving flag After setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006 SGS196, transmission setting of the game state designation command according to the states of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag is performed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 16 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not the non-probability variation jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). In addition, "0" is set in the time saving frequency counter (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special The value is updated to "0" corresponding to the symbol normal processing, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit).

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random value update process (step S77), a demonstration effect control process (step S78) for executing a demo effect in the pachinko game machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are changed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display is executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the background display update process of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 performs It is possible to execute control to update the displayed background image.

In the menu display process, in addition to the process of displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, the speaker is displayed in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B. It includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 .

In the demonstration effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, such as a timer for waiting for the start of the customer waiting demo effect, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the time-out of the timer without starting the variable display. In addition, when the variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration effect is interrupted, The display of the image display device 5 may be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 23 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area 5F or the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. A display effect determination process is executed (step S160). Also, a pending display update process (step S161) for updating the display mode of the pending display in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F is executed. The pending display update process is also a process for newly starting the display of the pending display or the active display whose display mode is newly determined in the pending display effect determination process. After executing the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Holding display effect determination process)
FIG. 25 shows determination ratios of the display modes of the pending display and the active display in the pending display effect shown in FIG. In the pending display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in FIG. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the variable display result is specified from the pattern designation command in the entry and the variation category is specified from the variation category command in the entry, and the specified variable display result and the variation category are specified. Based on this, whether or not to execute the suspension display effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of the suspension display and the active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25, when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the performance pattern α of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 25%. Then, the performance pattern β of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 5% of the time, it decides to execute the pending display effect with the effect pattern α. Then, the performance pattern β of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is other (normal reach), the non-execution of the pending display effect is decided at a rate of 75%, and the effect pattern α of the pending display effect is executed at a rate of 20%. is determined, and the performance pattern β of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the decisions decide not to execute the pending display effect, and 25% of the time decides to execute the pending display effect with the effect pattern α. Then, the performance pattern β of the pending display effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the pending display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the pending display flag of the entry to " 0" is set, and when it is decided to execute the performance pattern α of the pending display notice effect, "1" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry, and the effect pattern β of the pending display notice effect is set. is determined to be executed, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, after setting the value of 0 to 2 to the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the start-winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, the effect control CPU 120 performs the pending display update process (step S61 ), if the value of the pending display flag is set to "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a white circle (○), and the pending display is displayed. When "1" is set as the value of the flag, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a white square (◇), and "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag. , the suspended display or active display corresponding to the suspended display flag is displayed with a white star (*).

With these settings, if the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star in display pattern B, if the pending display or active display is displayed as a white circle When the ratio of control to the jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation) is higher than the above, and the pending display and active display are displayed in display pattern B white star, the pending display and active display are displayed in display pattern A Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the white rectangle is displayed, the display mode of these pending display and active display, that is, whether the pending display effect is executed or not It is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern and the performance pattern.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 006SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 006 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 006SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 006 SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than (for example, a combination of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a combination of 3 symbols as the stop symbols that are not aligned, "767", etc., according to the variation pattern. Determines the combination (missing pattern) that will be out of reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After execution of step 006SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 performs a continuous cracking effect setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous cracking effect during variable display, and a dialogue preview effect setting for executing a dialogue preview effect during variable display. processing (step 006SGS278), background change effect setting processing for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), reach suggestive effect setting processing for executing a reach suggestive effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), A cut-in effect setting process (step 006 SGS281) for executing a cut-in effect during variable display is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 006SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU120 is controlled to perform a variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU120 is the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous breaking effect setting process)
FIG. 27(A) is a flow chart showing the continuous crack effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 006SGS311). If the game state is the normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), refer to the receive command buffer 006SG194A at the time of start winning, and check whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous crack effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set. is specified (step 006SGS312), and it is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the value of the continuous crack effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous crack effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318, and if there is an entry with the value of the continuous crack effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), Based on the symbol designation command and the variable category command stored in the entry, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect (step 006 SGS314). In the present embodiment, the continuous crack effect in the normal state is executed over a plurality of variable displays for variable displays that have not yet been executed, so that the variable display result of the target variable display is a big hit. This is an effect suggesting that it will become (see FIG. 30).

When the gaming state is the normal state, in step 006SGS314, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Execution of the continuous breaking effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation category is non-reach, non-execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation category is other (normal reach), non-execution of the continuous break performance is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of the continuous break performance is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state/probability variable state, in step 006SGS314, if the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the continuous cracking production at a rate of 30%, and 70%. Determines the execution of the continuous cracking effect at the ratio of When the variable display result is lost and the variation category is non-reach, non-execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is normal reach, non-execution of the continuous break performance is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of the continuous break performance is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of the continuous breaking performance is determined at a rate of 60%. Thus, in the present embodiment, the ratio of control to the big hit game state when the continuous cracking effect is executed, that is, the big hit expectation is different between the normal state and the time saving state/probability variable state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the continuous breaking effect is determined in the process of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). When it is determined to execute the continuous cracking effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets "1" as the value of the continuous cracking effect flag of the entry, proceeds to step 006SGS318, and does not execute the continuous cracking effect. is determined (step 006SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets "0" as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag of the entry and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an entry in which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag, that is, whether or not execution of the continuous breaking effect is determined. (Step 006 SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of the continuous crack effect flag set to "1" (step 006 SGS318; N), the continuous crack effect setting process is terminated, and "1" is set as the value of the continuous crack effect flag. If there is an entry (step 006SGS318; Y), it is determined whether or not the entry in which "1" is set as the value of the continuous crack effect flag is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, the command received at the time of start winning. It is determined whether the entry is stored in the storage area of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous cracking effect flag is not the entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006 SGS319; N), it is determined that the variable display is not the target variable display of the continuous cracking effect. The execution setting of the first continuous cracking effect is performed according to the variable display, and the continuous cracking effect setting process is ended (step 006SGS320). (Step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display according to a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006 SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display according to a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321;N) performs execution setting of the second continuous cracking effect corresponding to the fact that the variable display is the target variable display of the continuous cracking effect, and ends the continuous cracking effect setting process (step 006SGS322).

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the continuous breaking effect when the game state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect is executed in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the continuous breaking effect. do. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous cracking effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second continuous cracking effect is not executed, while the variable display is a super reach. If it is a variable display with a variation pattern, the second continuous breaking effect is executed.

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state (step 006SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs the continuous breaking effect execution setting according to the variation pattern of the variable display, and the setting processing of the continuous cracking effect. is terminated (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect according to the variation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is performed. It may be determined by the highest ratio (execution ratio of continuous cracking effect for each variation pattern: super reach>normal reach>non-reach). Then, when the execution of the continuous cracking effect is determined, if the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, the continuous cracking effect (first continuous cracking effect) is set to be executed once or twice in the variable display. is performed, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is normal reach or super reach, the first continuous breaking effect is executed twice in the variable display, and the second continuous effect is performed once after the first continuous breaking effect is performed twice. It suffices to set the execution of the breaking effect.

In other words, the continuous cracking effect in the time saving state and the probability variable state of the present embodiment is an effect that can be executed multiple times in one variable display, and it is an effect that suggests that it will become a reach depending on the number of times it is executed. ing.

(Dialogue notice effect setting processing)
FIG. 28(A) is a flow chart showing the dialogue announcement effect setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006 SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialog announcement effect setting process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach without shortening, normal reach, or super reach. If there is (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of execution of the speech announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined according to the variation pattern and the result of the variable display (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variation pattern is non-reach and the variable display result is miss, the non-execution of the dialogue announcement effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the effect pattern A of the dialogue announcement effect is determined. at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the variation pattern is normal reach and the variable display result is misplacement, non-execution of dialogue announcement effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of dialogue announcement effect with effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 35%. , execution of the performance pattern B of the dialogue announcement performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variation pattern is super reach and the variable display result is a failure, 40% of the decision is made not to execute the dialogue announcement effect, and 10% of the decision is made to execute the dialogue announcement effect in the effect pattern A. Then, the performance pattern B of the speech advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the performance pattern C of the speech notice performance is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, non-execution of the speech advance notice performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the speech advance notice performance in the performance pattern A is decided at a rate of 5%, and the speech notice performance is performed. The execution of the pattern B is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the effect pattern C of the speech announcement effect is determined at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), production pattern A displays the dialogue "chance!?" is a production pattern, and production pattern B is a production pattern for displaying the line "It's hot!" Effect pattern C is a effect pattern in which the words “Extremely Hot!”

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the speech advance notice effect is executed during the variable display, control is made to the jackpot game state rather than the case where the speech notice effect is not executed (non-execution). is set high. Further, when the dialogue foretelling effect is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set to be the highest when the dialogue foretelling effect is executed in the performance pattern C, and the dialogue foretelling performance is set to the performance pattern A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be the lowest when it is executed (the degree of jackpot expectation according to the presence or absence of the execution of the dialogue announcement effect and the effect pattern: effect pattern C> effect pattern B> effect pattern A > no execution).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 26 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2. -7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-7. The variation pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3 , PB1-4, and PB1-7, reference is made to the receive command buffer 006SG194A at the start of winning.

When the gaming state is the normal state, the pattern specifying command indicating the big win is not stored in the receive command buffer 006SG194A at the time of start winning, that is, when there is no pending memory for the big win, as shown in FIG. 29(A). Then, the background image change is not executed and the background change effect is not executed at a rate of 60%, and the background image change is not executed and the background change effect is executed with a failure pattern (the variation pattern of the variable display is If any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the background change effect A is executed with a failure pattern, and the change pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2-4. , PB1-2, or PB1-4, execution of the background change effect B with a failure pattern) is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the background image change and execution of the background change effect with a success pattern. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, the background change effect A is executed with the success pattern, and the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B in success pattern) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the game state is the time saving state / variable probability state, the symbol designation command indicating the jackpot is not stored in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that will be the jackpot, the background image It is determined that no change is executed and no background change effect is executed at a rate of 50%, and the background image change is not executed and the background change effect is executed with a failure pattern (the change pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of background image change and the success pattern of background change effect (if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, and PA2-7, the success pattern of background change effect A is executed) at a rate of 5%. .

In addition, when the game state is the normal state, the symbol designation command indicating the big win is stored in the receive command buffer 006SG194A at the time of start winning, that is, if there is a pending memory for the big win, As shown, the background image change is not executed and the background change effect is not executed at a rate of 30%. If the pattern is any one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, the background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the variation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2. -4, PB1-2, or PB1-4, the execution with the failure pattern of the background change effect B) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the background image change and the success pattern of the background change effect Execution of (if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A, execution of the variable display If the variation pattern is any one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2 and PB1-4, execution of the background variation effect B with a success pattern) is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/probability variable state, the symbol designation command indicating the big hit is stored in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory that will be the big hit, the background image A change is not executed and a background change effect is not executed at a rate of 20%. -5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execution with a failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of background image change and success pattern of background change effect (if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, and PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 80%. Thus, in the present embodiment, the ratio of control to the big hit game state when the background change effect is executed, that is, the big hit expectation is different between the normal state and the time saving state/probability variable state.

When it is decided to execute one of the effect patterns of the background change effect, the execution setting is performed according to the effect pattern of the background change effect, and the background change effect is executed in the effect process during variable display according to the execution setting. Just run it. Further, when the change of the background image is determined (when the execution of the success pattern of the background change effect is determined), the change setting of the background image is performed. The background image may be changed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in FIG.

(Reach suggestion effect setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006 SGS280) shown in FIG. 26 will be described. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1 and PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, whether or not to execute a reach suggestion effect and the reach suggestion effect according to the change pattern of the variable display determine the production pattern of

For example, as shown in FIG. 29B, when the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the failure pattern of the reach suggestion effect at a rate of 20%. In addition, when the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the reach suggestion performance with a success pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. . That is, in the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win suggestion effect is executed, the ready-to-win (normal reach or super reach ready-to-win effect) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the ready-to-win suggestive effect is not executed. . Furthermore, when the ready-to-win suggestive effect is executed, the player is notified that the ready-to-win suggestive effect is not achieved by executing the ready-to-win suggestive effect in a failure pattern, while the ready-to-win suggestive effect is executed in a success pattern. The player is notified that the reach is achieved by executing the command.

In addition, when it is decided to execute any of the ready-to-reach suggestive production patterns, the execution setting is performed according to the production pattern of the ready-to-reach suggestive production, and the ready-to-reach suggestive production is performed in the variable display during production process according to the execution setting. Just run it.

(Cut-in effect setting processing)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in FIG. 26 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. determine whether or not If the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, PB1-7, cut-in according to the variable display result of the variable display The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern of cut-in performance are determined.

For example, when the game state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. The execution of the pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the cut-in performance pattern Y is determined at a rate of 5%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, non-execution of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of performance pattern X of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the performance pattern of cut-in performance is determined. Determine the run on Y at a rate of 70%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Further, when the cut-in performance is executed, when the cut-in performance is executed with the performance pattern Y, the control is performed to the big win game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in performance is executed with the performance pattern X. (Whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the degree of expectation for a big hit of the effect pattern: effect pattern Y>effect pattern X>non-execution of cut-in effect). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability variable state, if the variable display result is lost, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern X for 30 times. %, and execution of cut-in effect pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%. When the result of the variable display is a big win, non-execution of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of performance pattern X of cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 15%, and performance pattern of cut-in performance is determined. 75% of the time we decide to run on Y. Thus, in the present embodiment, the ratio of control to the big hit game state when the cut-in effect is executed, that is, the degree of expectation for the big hit differs between the normal state and the time saving state/probability variable state.

Note that the cut-in effect in the present embodiment is a effect of displaying different images according to the effect pattern (for example, an image of the characters "Heat!", an image of the characters "Chance!", etc.). This is an effect in which the ratio of control to the jackpot game state differs depending on which image is displayed (which effect pattern is executed) (in the present embodiment, the effect pattern X is " Chance!” is a production pattern that displays a character image, and production pattern Y is a production pattern that displays a character image of “Netsu!!”).

When it is decided to execute one of the cut-in effects in the effect pattern, the execution setting is performed according to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect process during variable display according to the execution setting. Just run it.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified by the effect accompanied by the breaking effect (see FIGS. 31 and 55), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect is not limited to this. As the production pattern of the production, a production pattern with a cracking production and a production pattern without a cracking production may be provided. For example, the performance pattern Y with a high degree of expectation for big win may be a performance pattern accompanied by a breaking performance, and the performance pattern X with a low expectation for big win may be a performance pattern without a breaking performance. Furthermore, in the case where the production pattern X is set as a production pattern not accompanied by a cracking production, when the production pattern X of the cut-in production is determined as the production pattern X, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed. It may be determined from a plurality of modes according to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined at different rates from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the break effect is accompanied as the cut-in effect, and when the break effect is not accompanied as the cut-in effect, the image is further displayed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of .

(Direction description)
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect, the ready-to-win effect, and the cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described continuous break effect, speech announcement effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect, a plurality of effects can be executed during variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, when the game state is the normal state, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, and the background change effect B , simulated continuous effect, ready-to-win effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, cut In effect and result notification effect can be executed. Incidentally, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect may be provided as effects that cannot be executed in the normal state and can be executed only in the time-saving state or the variable probability state. In this case, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determined ratios shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 29(C). In this way, it is possible to execute different types of break effects in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, in the first continuous crack effect among these effects, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. The break effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the break target image instead, breaks is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the glass plate image 006SG301 does not depend on the movement of the movable body 32, the action of the character, or the like. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and only the portion where the crack occurs is broken (only a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked). In the first continuous crack effect, the visibility of the background image is increased between the target area of the crack effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the crack effect) and other display areas. It is also a different performance. Furthermore, the first continuous break effect is a effect that may be executed in the variable display before the variable display of the look-ahead target, while in the time saving state and the probability variable state, it is executed multiple times during the execution of one variable display. It is an effect that can be performed, and it is also an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit depending on the number of times it is executed.

In the second continuous crack effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. is an effect that is executed from the start timing of variable display, cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the cracked portion breaks (the cracked range is Only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301) is an effect. In addition, in the second continuous crack effect, the visibility of the background image is increased between the target area of the crack effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the crack effect) and other display areas. It is also a different performance. Furthermore, the second continuous crack effect is a effect that may be executed in the variable display of the look-ahead target.

As the operation promoting effect, an operation promoting image is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. After that, according to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect in which a crack effect is executed, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the action of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the cracked portion is broken (the cracking range is the glass plate image Only part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of 006SG301) is an effect. In addition, the speech announcement effect is an effect in which the visibility of the background image is different between the target area of the crack effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the crack effect) and the other display area. At the same time, in the cracked area (target area for cracking effect), one of the lines "chance!", "hot!", and "hot!" The ratio to be played is different (suggesting the ratio (big hit expectation) controlled to the big hit game state by the displayed lines).

In the background change effect A, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. The background change effect A is a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked by the action of the character, and the background image is changed by breaking the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. Sometimes it is executed, and sometimes it is executed with a failure pattern in which the background image does not change because the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken).

Background change effect B is a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. Background change effect B is a successful pattern in which cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, and the background image changes by breaking the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked at the first stage but the crack at the second stage is not generated and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken, or the glass plate image 006SG301 is not cracked at the first stage and the second stage. There is a case where the failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) in which the background image does not change because the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack even though the first crack occurs.

In the pseudo-continuous effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a specific combination during execution of the variable display. It is an effect that re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started by executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is started by the movable body 32 moving. A crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed up to two times during one variable display. The color of the fragment of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A is different from the second pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (the control is performed in a big win game state). percentage) is even set to be high. That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect in the present embodiment, the rate (big-hit expectation) of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the color of the fragment of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the cracking effect executed as part of the pseudo-continuous effect is played. It is possible to suggest to the person.

The ready-to-reach suggesting effect is a effect to suggest that the ready-to-win state is established during the variable display, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. This is an effect in which a ready-to-win state may be established by executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead is broken. The reach indication effect is executed in a success pattern in which a crack is generated in the glass plate image 006SG301 by the action of the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, thereby establishing a reach. and a case where the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed even though a crack occurs due to the action of the character (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken), so that the reach is not established. be.

In the weak development effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the normal reach, and the glass plate image is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. 006SG301A is broken by executing the break performance, if the game state is the normal state, it is a performance that informs the player of the transition to the reach performance of super reach α, and the game state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. If so, it is an effect that notifies the player of the transition to the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ. In addition, the weak development effect is also a effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked without cracking due to the action of the character.

In the strong development effect A, when the game state is the normal state, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of super reach α. By executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken according to the operation of the movable body 32, it is an effect to inform the shift to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach β. When the state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state, after the reach performance of the normal reach, the glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed on the screen is broken in response to the movement of the movable body 32, thereby notifying the transition to the ready-to-win effect of super reach δ.

Strong development effect B is also an effect in which a crack occurs without the character acting, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. During the reach performance of super reach α, the glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. By executing the cracking effect, it is an effect that notifies the shift to the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach β, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced without cracking regardless of the action of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. This is an effect in which the entire displayed glass plate image 006SG301A is broken.

In the cut-in effect, an operation promoting image is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. After that, according to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect in which a breaking effect is executed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without causing cracks regardless of the action of the movable body or the action of the character. . In addition, in the cut-in effect, different cut-in images are displayed according to the effect pattern from when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and the ratio of control to the big win game state is different according to the displayed cut-in image (display It is an effect that suggests the ratio (big hit expectation) that is controlled to the big hit game state by the cut-in image that is played.

The result notification effect is an operation promoting effect in which an operation promoting image is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. After that, according to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 having a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. It is an effect that may notify that the game is controlled to a big hit game state by executing the cracking effect. In addition, the result notification effect is a success pattern that notifies that the whole glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken after the crack is generated by the action of the movable body, and that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. and when the movable body does not operate, cracks do not occur in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken). That is, there is a case where it is executed with a failure pattern informing that the variable display result is a failure. It should be noted that the result notification effect of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the time saving state or the probability variable state, exceptionally variable display of PA1-6, PB1-5 which is a non-reach jackpot or non-reach loss variation pattern (see FIG. 36).

(Production timing in each variation pattern)
Next, a rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect in the present embodiment will be described. First, the variable display when the game state is the normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. can be individually executed in the order from the start timing of the variable display to the first continuous cracking effect, the speech announcement effect, the background change effect A, and the ready-to-reach suggesting effect without overlapping the effect periods.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display is performed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are the variation patterns of shortened non-reach out, the first continuous break effect is performed from the start timing of the variable display. It is executable.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot and the normal reach loss, the dialogue announcement is made after a while from the start of the variable display. Effect, background change effect A, ready-to-win suggestive effect, and reach-to-win effect of normal reach can be individually executed in this order without duplication of effect periods.

As shown in FIG. 33(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are the variation patterns of the super reach α jackpot and the super reach α loss, the variable display starts from the start timing of the variable display. 2 continuous break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo-continuous effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, super reach α reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping the effect period. . In addition, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect of super reach α, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the ready-to-win effect of super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 34(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the variation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β loss, the variable display starts from the start timing of the variable display. 2 Continuous cracking effect, dialogue notice effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, reach effect of normal reach, weak development effect, reach effect of super reach α, strong development effect A, reach effect of super reach β respectively in order of effect period can be executed individually without duplication. In addition, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are separately executed overlapping with the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win β.

In particular, the character displayed in the background change effect A starts to be displayed after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (the display of the divided area in the display area of the image display device 5) is hidden. To prevent the deterioration of performance effects of each cracking performance caused by dispersing the player's attention to a plurality of cracking performances, since a new cracking performance does not occur where the cracking performance has already occurred. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 34(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β jackpot and the super reach β loss, the variable display starts from the start timing of the variable display. 2 continuous cracking effect, background change effect B, 1st pseudo-continuous effect, 2nd pseudo-continuous effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, super reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, super reach β reach Each production period can be individually executed in the order of production without overlapping. In addition, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are separately executed overlapping with the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win β.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the variable display for executing the background change effect B and the variable display for executing the speech announcement effect are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue forewarning effect may be effects that can be executed during the same variable display. Further, in the case where the background change effect B and the dialogue forewarning effect are made to be executable during the same variable display, when the execution of the background change effect B is determined, the background change effect B and the dialogue notice effect are executed. The execution period of the speech announcement effect may be prevented from overlapping. By doing so, for example, by executing the cracking effect as the speech announcement effect while the crack is occurring as the background change effect B, the player who has executed the cracking effect as the background change effect B is executed. It is possible to prevent misrecognition by the player, ie, misrecognition by the player when the background image changes.

Next, the variable display when the game state is the time saving state or the variable probability state will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is the variation pattern of non-reach loss, it is a variation pattern of non-reach loss and non-reach big hit. When it is determined to execute the continuous cracking performance for PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous cracking performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. When the execution of the background change effect is determined as a prefetch for PB1-7, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, the variable display of PB1-5, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, is targeted, and as the pre-reading notice effect, the crack gradually spreads in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display before the variable display. At the start of the variable display of PB1-5, an effect (so-called instant winning effect, special continuous breaking effect) in which a breaking effect is executed and a big win pattern is displayed may be executed. Since the effect is an immediate hit effect, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as the cracking effect may be faster than that of the fragments displayed as other cracking effects.

As shown in FIGS. 35(C) and 35(D), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is the variation pattern of non-reach loss, it is a variation pattern of non-reach loss and non-reach big hit. When it is decided to execute the continuous crack effect for PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous crack effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and super reach δ. When the execution of the background change effect is determined as a look-ahead for PB1-7, which is the variation pattern of the big hit, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(A), regarding the case where the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach loss, the variation pattern of the continuous break effect and the super reach δ jackpot When the execution of the background change effect is not determined as a look-ahead targeting PB1-7, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, the variable display After the first continuous break performance is individually executed three times from the start timing, the result notification performance is further executed.

As shown in FIG. 36(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is the variation pattern of the loss of normal reach, from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, there is no effect other than the variable display of the decoration pattern. It is not executed, and only the reach effect of normal reach is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 36(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are the variation patterns of super reach γ jackpot or super reach γ loss, reach from the start timing of variable display. Until the timing, the effects other than the variable display of the decorative patterns are not executed, and from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, and super reach γ reach effect can be performed individually without overlapping the effect period. there is It should be noted that during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win γ, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win γ.

As shown in FIG. 36(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach δ jackpot or super reach δ loss, reach from the start timing of variable display. During the period until the timing, the background change effect A can be executed. Further, from the ready-to-win timing, the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach, the strong development effect A, and the ready-to-win effect of the super reach δ can be individually executed in this order without duplication of the effect periods. In addition, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect of super reach δ, cut-in effect and result notification effect are separately executed overlapping with the ready-to-win effect of super reach δ.

(Flow of production in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of effects in super reach α will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in super reach α. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in super reach α. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach α is started, the first background image (for example, An image representing the scenery of the city in the daytime is displayed, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display, the second continuous break effect is started. Specifically, when the second continuous crack effect is started, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, thereby changing the crack precursor image into a cracked mode. (see FIG. 37A2), a crack effect is executed in which a portion of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked and a plurality of fragment images scatter. Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in a partially cracked area (specific range) in the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and depending on the type of the displayed character image, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit. suggested (see FIG. 37(A3)). After the second continuous breaking effect is finished, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the second continuous cracking effect is finished, the dialogue announcement effect is started. Specifically, an operation prompting image for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the speech announcement effect is started (see FIG. 37 (A4)). The operation prompting image includes a button image imitating the push button 31B, a text image "Press!!", an indicator image indicating the operation effective period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period expires without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is cracked. is displayed so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 37A5), a part of the crack target image replacing the crack precursor image is cracked, and a plurality of fragment images scatter. A split effect is executed. Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. After that, a character image saying "Chance!?" is suggested (see FIG. 37 (A6)). After the dialog forewarning effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the speech announcement effect, the background change effect A is started. Specifically, after the effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A7)), the character image (object image) is displayed when the appearance of the character is determined (see FIG. 37 ( A8)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed according to the action of the character image (for example, the character kicks), and the crack precursor image is displayed by displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image. After being displayed in the mode (see FIG. 37 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image replacing the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images scatter (FIG. 37 (A10) reference). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as the background image (Fig. 37 (A11 )reference). After the background change effect A ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period elapses after the background change effect A ends, the ready-to-win suggesting effect is started. Specifically, the decoration design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration design display area 5L, and the character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in accordance with the action of the character image (for example, the character hits the area corresponding to the left decorative design display area 5L with a mallet), and a crack is formed on the left side of the crack precursor image. is displayed so that the crack precursor image is displayed in the first crack mode (see FIG. 37 (A13)). A crack is displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the action of hitting the character image, so that the crack precursor image changes from the first crack mode to the second crack mode (see FIG. 37 (A14)). (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet) (FIG. 37 (A15)), if a crack is determined, a crack target that replaces the crack precursor image A split effect is executed in which the entire image is split and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 37 (A16)).

Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, decorative patterns with the same number are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and the N-reach performance is started.

When a predetermined period elapses after the N reach performance is started, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after the character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A17)), the action of the character image (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen and moves to the glass plate). A crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed (see FIG. 38 (A18)) in response to the punching operation), and the crack is replaced by the crack precursor image without displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image. A split effect is executed in which the entire target image is split and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 38 (A19)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a weak S reach effect A (for example, a bowling match between a friend character and an enemy character) is started (see (A20) to (A22) in FIG. 38).

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the weak S ready-to-win effect, the strong development effect A is started. Specifically, after the development symbol with the characters "development" displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 38 (A23)), the movable body 32 operates (for example, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a production position that overlaps the approximate center position of the display screen), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in part of the crack precursor image. A crack effect is executed in which the whole area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked and a plurality of fragment images scatter (see FIG. 38 (A24)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a reach title image is displayed, and a strong S reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (Fig. 38 (A25) to (A27). )reference).

When a predetermined period elapses after the strong S reach effect is started, the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, after the strong S reach effect is started, at a predetermined timing, an operation prompting image for prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed (see FIG. 38 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period expires without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is cracked. is not displayed, the whole area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images scatter. Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. After that, a character image "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed character image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit (see FIG. 38 (A29)). ). After the cut-in effect ends, the strong S reach effect is executed again.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the cut-in effect is completed, the result notification effect is started. Specifically, first, after an image in which the ally character delivers the last blow is displayed (see FIG. 39 (A30)), the ally character motion is displayed in slow motion and the image is faded out (see FIG. 39). (See A31)).

When the variable display result is the big hit display result, after the image of the friendly character hitting the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 39 (A32)), the action of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen). A crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed according to the motion of falling from an upper origin position to a predetermined effect position between the origin position and the effect position), and a crack is displayed in part of the crack precursor image. As a result, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a manner in which the movable body 32 cracks downward), and a white-out image (effect image) is displayed on the entire display screen (FIG. 39). (See A33)).

Next, according to the motion of the movable body (for example, the return-to-origin motion in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position above the display screen to the origin position), the whole area of the crack target image replaced by the crack precursor image is cracked, and a plurality of fragments are generated. A break effect in which the image scatters is executed (see FIG. 39 (A34)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the determined decoration patterns of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify that the ally character has won the battle of the enemy character. be. In addition, the background image is displayed as a fifth background image 006SG085 (for example, a rainbow image) for big wins, and the movable body lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, rainbow) for a predetermined effect. After the sound is output and it is notified that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 39 (A35)), the background image returns to the first background image, and the confirmed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed ( See FIG. 39 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a displaced display result, after an image in which the enemy character's punch hits the friend character is displayed (see FIG. 39 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move and the crack precursor image ( Glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, whereby the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a manner in which a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and the display screen A gray image (effect image) is displayed over the entire area (see FIG. 39 (A38)).

Next, after the white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 39 (A39)), as the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the fixed decorative symbols of the non-jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed. It is reported that the character has lost the battle of the enemy character (FIG. 39 (A40). Also, after it is reported that the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, the background image returns to the first background image and the combination that is not the jackpot is displayed. is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 39 (A41)).

(Flow of production in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of effects in Super Reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in Super Reach β. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the flow of effects in Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 40 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach β is started, the first background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, variable display of the decorative design is executed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack display area made up of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the lower left of the crack precursor image. After the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 40(B2)), two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image, whereby the crack precursor image is displayed in stages. (See FIG. 40 (B3)), and when a crack is determined, a crack effect is executed in which the whole area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked and a plurality of fragment images scatter. (See FIG. 40 (B4)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 40(B5)).

After the background change effect A is completed, the variable display is executed again, and after the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L (see FIG. 40 (B6)), in the right decorative design display area 5R, By temporarily stopping and displaying a decorative symbol having the same number as the temporarily stopped decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 40(B7)).

When a predetermined period elapses after the background change effect B ends, the pseudo-continuous effect is started. Specifically, in the center decoration symbol display area 5C, a pseudo-continuous symbol with the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is started is decelerated and displayed before the stop display position (Fig. 40 ( B8)).

Next, after the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 40 (B9)), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and one of the crack precursor images is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode by displaying the crack in the part (see FIG. 40 (B10)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 is displayed from the origin position at the top of the display screen). 40), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is broken, and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (Fig. 40). (See B11)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the variable display resumes after a character image such as "x2" indicating the number of times of re-variable display is displayed (see (B12) to (B13) in FIG. 40). .

In addition, in the case of variable display in which the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuous symbols pass through the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. A decorative pattern with a number one larger than the number is stopped and displayed, and a variable display result of failure is displayed (see FIG. 40 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is restarted, in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect of the triple pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern with the characters "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C. Deceleration display is performed before the stop display position (see FIG. 40 (B14)). After the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 40 (B15)), a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode by displaying the crack (see FIG. 40 (B16)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position above the display screen to the display screen). 40 (B17), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is broken, and a plurality of fragment images scatter (FIG. 40 (B17). )reference). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the variable display resumes after a character image such as "x3" indicating the number of times of re-variable display is displayed (see (B18) to (B19) in FIG. 41). .

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect of the double pattern, and the third time in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect of the triple pattern, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L are displayed. (See FIG. 41 (B20)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative design display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative design display area 5R, resulting in N reach (see FIG. 41 (B20)). (See FIG. 41 (B21)), the N-reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period elapses after the N-reach performance is started, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after the character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B22)), the action of the character image (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen and moves toward the glass plate). A crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed (see FIG. 41 (B23)) in response to the punching operation), and the crack is replaced by the crack precursor image without displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image. A split effect is executed in which the entire target image is split and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 41 (B24)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (B25) to (B26) in FIG. 41).

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B is started. Specifically, when the strong development effect B is started, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner. After being displayed (see FIG. 41 (B27)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images scatter (see FIG. 41 (B28)). Note that a white-out image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the breaking effect. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, after the development symbol with the characters "development" displayed in the middle decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 41 (B29)), the ready-to-win title image is displayed. is displayed, and a strong S reach effect B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 41 (B30)). It should be noted that the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with a higher degree of expectation than the strong S reach effect A. Further, since the strong S-reach effect B is an S-reach effect with a higher degree of expectation than the strong S-reach effect A, the cut-in effect, which will be described later, is easily executed in the effect pattern Y. That is, the strong S reach effect B is a effect in which a fragment image 006SG302, which will be described later, is more likely to be displayed than the strong S reach effect A.

The strong S reach effect B is almost the same as the strong S reach effect A of the super reach α, except that the types of enemy characters and the like are different. .

(Example of operation of various productions)
Next, operation examples of cracking effects in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 58. FIG.

In addition, an example of expression indicating a display mode used in the following description will be described.

"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time elapses, while "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time elapses. It is a display that decreases the transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame (one frame) before. , and at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the display image may be changed from the image of one frame before so that the visibility can be changed. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays involving image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as fade-out display and fade-in display, which do not involve image displacement but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (the number of frames) displayed in one-second moving images is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the visibility of the image in comparison with the image one frame before. display).

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 58, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative patterns (for the low base state) displayed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular numerals when viewed from the front. A number display part consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the base part and the number base part, and 10 kinds of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the number display part (illustration of all characters is omitted), a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about the character displayed in front of the information pedestal (for example, character name) and a substantially rectangular pedestal display portion that surrounds the number display portion, the character display portion, and the information display portion (see FIG. 1, etc.).

Although not described in detail, when the game state is the high base state or in other production modes, the decorative patterns having a display mode different from the above-described decorative patterns for the low base state are displayed in each decorative design display area. 5L, 5C, and 5R may be variably displayed. In addition, as a variable display mode of the decoration pattern for the low base state, a mode in which the display screen is vertically scrolled from the top to the bottom is exemplified, but other variable display modes may be used, and the game state and the The variable display mode may differ depending on the presentation mode.

In the display area 5S provided in the upper left part of the image display device 5, the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decoration pattern are displayed. The small patterns consist of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decoration pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative patterns and the numbers of the small patterns correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily correspond to each other. It may be a number from '1' to '5' which is less than the number '0' to '9', or it may be a symbol or figure different from the number of the decorative pattern.

In the special figure suspension storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, the first suspension display 006SG101 (see FIG. 91) and the second suspension display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended ) is displayed, and an active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen. In addition, these 1st reservation memory number, 2nd reservation memory number, small pattern, special figure reservation memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes.

<First continuous cracking effect and second continuous cracking effect>
Details of the operation examples of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the details of an operation example of the first continuous crack effect. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the second continuous breaking effect.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), when the game state is the normal state, a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the decorative design in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second game is displayed. When the continuous crack effect is started, the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and is positioned slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread radially from the edge. Also, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed with the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack mode is conspicuous. is displayed (see FIG. 42(B)). Further, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability variable state, a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second continuous break effect is started. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area higher than the sixth background image which is the normal background image for the time saving state / variable probability state, and the glass plate image 006SG301 The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. In addition, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are the same as the glass plate image 006SG301 when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While displayed with 1 visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack mode is displayed prominently. be done.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken ( A glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect (see FIG. 42(C)). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 become visible (see FIG. 42(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the white-out image becomes visible. The display of 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 42(E)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305 and the background effect image 006SG314 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed. After being displayed (see FIG. 42(F)), the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305, and the background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see FIG. 42(G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed with the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display region 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the crack display region 006SG304 (specific range) is displayed. is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher in visibility than the second visibility. That is, since the visibility is different between the unbroken region and the portion seen through the broken region, it becomes easier to recognize that the glass plate image 006SG301 is partly broken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43, the second continuous crack effect is almost the same as the first continuous crack effect except that the types of characters that appear are different, so a detailed description is omitted here. do. In the present embodiment, the examples of the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect are substantially the same, but the example of the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect can be different.

For example, the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have a common cracking pattern D, and the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction in the same manner. 42(B), the crack is displayed on the right side, while the crack is displayed on the left side in FIG. 43(B). The position at which the display is started may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is shown between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect.

Further, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301). display mode may suggest which of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect will be executed. Also, the crack pattern may be different between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect. In particular, for the second continuous crack effect, the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect and a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect can be output, and both crack at the display timing of the white-out image 006SG303. It may be output along with the sound, character voice may be output after outputting the cracking sound at the display timing of the white-out image 006SG303, or the output of the cracking sound may be restricted. good.

<Dialogue announcement performance>
Details of an operation example of the speech announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG. 44 . FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the details of an operation example of the speech announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 44(A), when the speech announcement effect is started while the decorative design variable display is being performed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first background image 006SG081 is higher than the first background image 006SG081. The operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 44B).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period expires without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompting image 006SG310 disappears and a layer above the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the 4 image drawing area, and the crack is displayed so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. displayed in the form. Also, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed with the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack mode is conspicuous. is displayed (see FIG. 44(C)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, A crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect (see FIG. 44(D)). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 become visible (see FIG. 44(E)), and the transmittance reaches 100%. , the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 44(F)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, "Chance! ?” and a serif background image 006SG087 as its background are displayed (see FIG. 44(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the character image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the text image 006SG306 is displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301. 1 Background image 006SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken region and the portion visible through the broken region, it becomes easier to recognize that the glass plate image 006SG301A is partially broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the dialogue background image 006SG087, and the character image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 44(H)).

In FIG. 44C, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack is added to a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301). It may be possible to display, and depending on the display mode of the effect image, it may be suggested which dialogue character image 006SG306 of "Chance!", "Hot!", and "Extremely hot!" In addition, depending on the type of serif characters, the crack pattern may be changed (the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302, etc.). ), while using a common crack pattern, the position of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the closer to the center) and the range of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the wider the crack). You can change it. Further, character voices corresponding to the types of the character image 006SG305 can be output, and all of them may be output together with cracking sounds at the display timing of the white-out image 006SG303, or they may be output at the display timing of the white-out image 006SG303. may be output after outputting the character voice, or the output of the crackling sound may be restricted.

<Background change effect A>
Details of an operation example of the background change effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change effect A. FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change effect A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45(A), when the game state is the normal state, the background change effect A is started when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after the display is gradually enlarged (see FIGS. 45B and 45C), the effect image 006SG320 fades out. A character image 006SG305 is displayed (see FIG. 45(D)). Further, when the game state is the time saving state/probability variable state, when the background change effect A is started while the decorative design variable display is executed in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the time saving is performed. The effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the sixth background image which is the normal background image for the state/probability changing state, and after being gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed. is displayed.

Note that the effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 45(B) is an effect that prompts whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in FIG. 45(D). In the case of a failure pattern, the process does not proceed to FIG. 45C, and the effect image 006SG320 is reduced and then hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 is not displayed.

Next, when the game state is the normal state, after the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, the character image 006SG305 is displayed on the front side. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack mode, the crack is displayed so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301 in response to the kicking motion toward the glass plate image 006SG301. (See FIG. 45(E)), and the crack gradually expands radially to change into a crack mode (See FIG. 45(F)). In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are , when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. By being displayed, the crack mode is displayed conspicuously. Further, when the gaming state is the time-saving state/probability variable state, after the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area higher than the sixth background image, the character image 006SG305 is displayed. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in front of the crack by displaying the crack so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301 according to the action of kicking toward the front side. After that, the crack gradually expands radially and changes into a cracked form. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. By doing so, the crack mode is displayed conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is entirely broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect (see FIG. 45(G)). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIGS. 45(H) and 46(I)). After the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100% (see FIG. 46(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 46(K)). In this way, the crack effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, so that the change of the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 is naturally recognized. Since it can be shown, the background change can be shown without discomfort. In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state / probability variable state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 A crack effect is executed in which the displayed glass plate image 006SG301A is entirely broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. And the visibility of the 7th background image which is a chance background image for fragment|piece image 006SG302 and time saving state/probability variation state becomes high because the transmittance|permeability increases gradually with progress of time. Then, after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100%, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, it is possible to naturally show that the sixth background image has changed to the seventh background image. Therefore, it is possible to show the background change without discomfort.

Further, for example, it is possible to display a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed than the second background image 006SG082 as a background image. It may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 is displayed or the third background image is displayed. Also, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to indicate whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed.

<Background change effect B>
Details of an operation example of the background change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change effect B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the background change effect B is started while the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the upper layer 4 image drawing area, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of a crack including a small crack area is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 47(B)). After that, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, so that the crack state of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes step by step (see FIG. 47(C) ).

In this way, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. When it is not displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility. As a result, the cracks are conspicuously displayed.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 47C, the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 is While displayed with the second visibility, each crack display region 006SG324 is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher in visibility than the second visibility. That is, since the visibility is different between the unbroken region and the portion seen through the broken region, it becomes easier to recognize that the glass plate image 006SG301 is partly cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. A crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the 5-image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect (see FIG. 47(D)). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 47(E)). After the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100% (see FIG. 47(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 47(G)). In this way, when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, the crack effect is executed, so that the change of the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 is naturally recognized. Since it can be shown, the background change can be shown without discomfort.

Further, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301). You may suggest the development expectation degree of production|presentation by the display mode of . Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is easy to end in the first stage (see FIG. 47(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, the second stage (see FIG. 47(C) See) is easy to end, and in the case of red, it is preferable that it is most likely to develop into a cracking effect compared to blue and green. Also, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transmittance gradually increases after 1500 ms has elapsed from the start of background change effect B, and the display disappears (fade-out display). As shown in FIG. 64(C), when failure pattern 2 ends at the second stage, the transmittance may gradually increase after 3000 ms have elapsed from the start of background change effect B, and display may be disabled.

Further, while the background change effect B is being executed, the change effect for the active display/suspended display, which is an image displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, is limited, while the glass plate image 006SG301 It is also possible not to limit effects using images (for example, mini-character images) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the layer image drawing area. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect of the breaking production.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
Details of an operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of part of the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 48(A), after the pseudo-continuous effect is started, a pseudo-continuous symbol displaying the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is started is displayed in the center decoration symbol display area 5C. When the temporary stop display is performed at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area higher than the second background image 006SG082, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed from approximately the center position of the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread radially. Also, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed with the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack mode is conspicuous. is displayed (see FIG. 48(B)).

Also, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then is out of the frame and is not displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the movable body 32 starts to fall from the origin position to the rendering position. After 006SG303 is displayed (see FIG. 48(C)), the white-out image 006SG303 spreads to the surroundings, and is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the break effect is started (see FIG. 48 ( D)). Further, along with the display of the white-out image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301. The entire area of 006SG301A is split, and a split effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Note that the white-out image 006SG303 is a white image that is displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 48(E)). Then, when the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the rendering position in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The action effect image 006SG321 for the purpose is displayed so as to spread out from the movable body 32, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area so as to spread out from the movable body 32 (FIG. 48 (F ), see (G)).

Next, after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends, the movable body 32 starts moving from the effect position toward the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is being displayed (see FIG. 48(G)), After all the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden, the game is stopped at the performance position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see FIG. 48(H)).

It should be noted that the operation of returning the movable body 32 from the rendering position to the origin position to the origin position may be started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed and then the display of the background effect image 006SG322 is completed. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display is started in the pseudo consecutive effect, but the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first variable display. The display color of the plate image 006SG301 is blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display is green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display is red. For example, the display mode of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be changed. Further, for example, the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made different such that the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 gradually increase each time the re-variable display is performed.

Also, in this case, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times of re-variable display, but it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. In this way, by standardizing the breaking patterns in gaming machines that perform various breaking effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that the pseudo-continuous effects have been executed. In addition, the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display share the same operation pattern of the movable body 32. For example, the first re-variable display and the second re-variable display The display mode of the crack pattern may differ between the variable display and the third re-variable display, such as the size of the fragment image 006SG302 being different, the number of fragment images 006SG302 being displayed being different, and the moving speed of the fragment image 006SG302 being different. .

<Reach Suggestion Production>
Details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the ready-to-win suggestive effect. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the ready-to-win suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), when the ready-to-win suggestion effect is started while the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in the respective decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the left decorative design display area 5L is decorated. After the symbol is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 49(B)), the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 49(C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the character image 006SG305 hits the area corresponding to the left decoration design display area 5L with a mallet. , a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first crack mode, and the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is moved. An effect image 006SG323 is displayed (see FIG. 49(D)).

Next, when the character image 006SG305 hits the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet, a crack is displayed on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby changing the glass plate image 006SG301 into the second crack mode. While being displayed so as to change, the motion effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 49(E)).

Further, when the character image 006SG305 hits the region corresponding to the center decoration design display area 5C with a mallet (see FIG. 49(F)), the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position of the layer 7 image drawing region. After that (see FIG. 49(G)), the white-out image 006SG303 spreads around and is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see FIG. 49(H)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 49(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is dropped downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. After being displayed, it frames out and becomes invisible. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49(H), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed on the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. The entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the decoration pattern, the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 50(I)). Then, when the transmittance becomes 100%, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is terminated, and after the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and emphasized (Fig. 50 ( J)), the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 50(K)).

In addition, in various effects involving the crack effect in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of FIGS. After it is handled and hidden, the production progresses (for example, it progresses from a reach suggestive production with a cracking production to a reach production without a cracking production).

Further, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301). The display mode of may suggest the degree of expectation of reach development. Specifically, in the case where there are blue and red display modes of the effect image, it is preferable that the effect image displayed in red is easier to reach than the effect image displayed in blue.

In the case of the failure pattern, after the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the center decoration design display area 5C with the mallet (see FIGS. 49(G) and (H)). , the disappointing character image 006SG305 is displayed in the area corresponding to the center decoration design display area 5C, and then the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, and the missing design stops. to end the variable display.

<Weak development direction>
Details of an operation example of the weak development effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of weak development effect.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), even if the game state is in any state of the normal state and the time saving state/probability variable state, the variable display of the decorative design in each decorative design display area 5L, 5C, 5R is a reach mode When the weak development effect is started when , the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the character image 006SG305 is displayed at the approximately center position of the upper layer 6 image drawing area. Later (see FIG. 51(B)), after the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while being enlarged as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 51(C)). . The decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in reduced size.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. The entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect (see FIG. 51(D)). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases (see FIG. 51(E)). Then, after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100% (see FIG. 51F), when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 51F). 51(G)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the white-out image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed to shift to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 51(H)). Further, when the gaming state is the time saving state/probability variable state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. A crack effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is entirely broken without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases. Then, after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100%, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed again when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. Then, when a predetermined period has passed since the white-out image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the transition is made to the weak S reach effect. In FIGS. 60 and 73 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is non-transparent. is displayed in a transparent mode (for example, a transmittance of 70% or more) in FIGS. are displayed in a non-transmissive manner (eg less than 10% transmittance). That is, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 79(B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized in the transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to FIG. can do.

In this way, when the N-reach effect develops into the weak S-reach effect, the split effect is executed, so that the change of the N-reach effect image to the weak S-reach effect image 006SG088 can be shown naturally. Therefore, it is possible to show the change in performance without discomfort.

<Strong development production A>
Details of an example of the strong development effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing details of a part of the operation example of the strong development effect A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 52(A), in the weak S ready-to-win effect, the development pattern with the characters "Development" displayed is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development effect A is started, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position. When the falling motion starts, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed substantially in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 falls (Fig. 52(B)). The white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the breaking effect is started.

In addition, as a front stage effect before the breaking effect, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position, the layer 5 image drawing area is higher than the weak S reach effect image 006SG088. , the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, and the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a plurality of small fragments larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. 52(C)).

The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque). Since the ratio remains 0%, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed on the layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 52(C)). As the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 increases (see FIG. 52(D)). Next, when the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, the fact that the movable body 32 has moved to the rendering position is emphasized in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The action effect image 006SG325 for the purpose is displayed so as to spread out from the movable body 32, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area so as to spread out from the movable body 32 (FIG. 52 (E )reference).

Next, after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is finished and the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden, the movable body 32 starts moving from the effect position to the origin position (see FIG. 52(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position is completed, and the ready-to-win title image 006SG326 is displayed, leading to a strong S-to-win effect (see FIG. 52(G)).

<Strong development production B>
Details of an operation example of the strong development effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of strong development effect B. FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of strong development effect B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 53A, when the strong development effect B is started when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the weak S reach effect, a layer 4 image higher than the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the drawing area as a crack precursor image, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying cracks radially extending from a substantially central position of the glass plate image 006SG301. (See FIG. 53(B)). In addition, the decoration pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area do not display the glass plate image 006SG301. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack is conspicuous. is displayed.

Also, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then is out of the frame and is not displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, after the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 53(C)), the white-out image 006SG303 spreads over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed (see FIG. 53(D)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 53D, at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed on the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. The entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases with the lapse of time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 increases (see FIG. 53(E)). Next, when the transmittance becomes 100%, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends, and the decoration pattern in which the character "development" is displayed in the middle decoration design display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that (see FIG. 53(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 53(G)).

Next, after the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 53(H)), the white-out image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the white-out image 006SG303 spreads over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed, and the development pattern is hidden (see FIG. 54(I)). As the transmittance gradually increases with the lapse of time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect increases (see FIGS. 54(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing the breaking effect when developing from the weak S reach effect to the strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it look as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is broken and changed to the reach title image 006SG326. Therefore, it is possible to show changes in the reach performance without discomfort.

<Cut-in production>
Details of an operation example of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), when the cut-in effect is started when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the strong S reach effect, the background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect is higher than the fourth background image 006SG084. An operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 55(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation effective period expires without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is placed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084. The entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked manner, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. A break effect is executed. In addition, the operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in a state in which the button is pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, and is enlarged and displayed as time elapses (FIG. 55(C), (D)).

In addition, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the break effect is started. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 55(C)). In addition, since the operation prompting image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area higher than the whiteout image 006SG303, the visibility is the same as the first visibility when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed. It is displayed while maintaining the first visibility.

As the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible (see FIG. 55(D)). , and the character image 006SG307 becomes visible (see FIG. 55(E)), and after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 55(F) ), the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden (see FIG. 55(G)).

In the present embodiment, the production patterns X and Y for the cut-in production are both described as production patterns accompanied by a split production, but as the production pattern for the cut-in production, the production pattern Y with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is broken. A chance production pattern accompanied by production may be used, and production pattern X with a low degree of expectation for a big hit may be produced as a production pattern without cracking production. A cut-in image (not shown) may be displayed.

<Result notification performance (big hit)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (big hit) will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a big hit. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the cut-in effect is completed, a character image 006SG305 showing a teammate character attacking the enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect is started. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and is faded out while being displayed in slow motion, and then a white-out image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed on the entire display screen (see FIG. 56B). ).

Next, when the variable display result is the big win display result, after the object image 006SG308 in which the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 56(C)), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the predetermined effect position. In response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308, and the glass plate image 006SG301 The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying a crack extending downward from the movable body 32 . Further, the object image 006SG308 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. When 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the crack is conspicuously displayed (see FIG. 56(D)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then disappears. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started at a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 56(E)), and the movable body 32 moves up from the predetermined effect position to the origin position. is started, the white-out image 006SG303 spreads downward and is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period (see FIG. 56F).

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(F), at the timing when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed on the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and Instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of small fragment images larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A crack effect is executed in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters. It should be noted that the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack effect. The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. As the transmittance gradually increases with the lapse of time, the decorative design and the fragment image 006SG302 become more visible (see FIG. 56(G)).

Next, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance becomes 100%, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the confirmed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 56(H)), the fragment image 006SG302. is completed, it is notified that the game state is controlled to the big win (see FIG. 57(I)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the fixed decoration pattern of the big win combination is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 57(I)). See FIG. 57(J)).

In addition, after the crack effect is started in response to the start of the upward motion for the movable body 32 to return to the origin, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 that has become visible due to the increase in the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed. The fact that a big win has been achieved can be quickly notified by completing the upward motion of returning the movable body 32 from the predetermined performance position to the origin position before it ends (becomes hidden).

<Result notification effect (loss)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the cut-in effect is completed, a character image 006SG305 showing a teammate character attacking the enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect is started. Then, the motion speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and is faded out while being displayed in slow motion, and then a white-out image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed on the entire display screen (see FIG. 58B). ).

Next, when the variable display result is a deviated display result, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period in the layer 7 image drawing area without moving the movable body 32 (FIG. 58(C) reference). The white-out image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the start of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305.

After that, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, and the crack is displayed so as to spread radially from a substantially central position in the glass plate image 006SG301. , the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed in the first layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While displayed with 1 visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack mode is displayed prominently. (See FIG. 58(D)).

Also, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed so as to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then is out of the frame and is not displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

In this way, although the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the cracking effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301 is not performed while the cracked state is maintained, so that the jackpot game state is not controlled. be notified.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked manner, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed again in the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 58(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed. After being displayed (see FIG. 58(F)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and fixed decoration symbols of non-jackpot combinations are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 58(G)).

(Production details)
Next, a detailed description will be given of each effect that can be executed in the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 59, 61, 42, and 43, as the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, first, the crack of the first stage is generated in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms. It is displayed (first stage crack display period). Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Further, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 400 ms (white-out display latter period). Therefore, in the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the white-out image 006SG303 in the white-out display initial period of 400 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image. It is impossible to see 006SG302. On the other hand, during 600ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing of the break of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second-stage crack is displayed over 3000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area for crack effect) (second-stage crack display period). The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect has transparency, and other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 ( For example, a background image, etc.) can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over the above-described crack display period of 500 ms, and the glass plate Over 1000 ms from the timing of cracking of image 006SG301A, the cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (cracking sound output period). Note that the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have the same types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound to be output, but in the first continuous cracking effect, FIG. ) is output, and in the second continuous crack effect, a crack effect sound and a second character voice corresponding to the character shown in FIG. 43(E) are output. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. Furthermore, the cracking effect sound is louder than the cracking effect sound and is a sound that is easily recognized by the player, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output with a volume even higher than the cracking effect sound, Moreover, since the output period is longer than that of the cracking effect sound, the sound is more easily recognized by the player than the cracking effect sound.

Further, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and over 800 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for breaking effect (white-out 800 ms), Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect. It should be noted that, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the break effect is completed, the normal background image light emission data table is used again to perform light emission in the mode corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). will be In the light emission data table for crack effect (800 ms whiteout display), the game effect lamp 9 emits white light with high luminance for 400ms corresponding to the first period of whiteout display, and for 400ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light alternately between high luminance and low luminance.

As shown in FIGS. 59, 62, and 44, as the dialogue announcement effect, first, as the operation promotion effect, an operation promotion effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (during which the operation prompting effect is executed). When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, the first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from the timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when it comes time to break the glass plate image 006SG301A, a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, so that the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is performed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period ). Further, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 400 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the dialogue forewarning effect of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the whiteout display initial period of 400 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It has become. On the other hand, during 600ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Further, from the timing of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a crack of the second stage is displayed for 5000 ms around the cracked area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area for cracking effect). It should be noted that the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the speech announcement effect has transparency, and other images (for example, a background image, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment image 006SG302. is visible to a person.

Also, in the speech announcement effect, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms, which is the first stage crack display period (cracking sound output period). , and over 1000 ms from the timing of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (breaking effect sound output period). In addition, the type of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are the same for the dialog preview effect, the first continuous cracking effect, and the second continuous cracking effect, and the cracking effect sound is output in the dialog preview effect. Afterwards (when the crack effect sound output period elapses), the dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of the character image 006SG306 is output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking effect sound.

Further, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the normal background image light emission data table until the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and over 800 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for breaking effect (white-out 800 ms), Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect. It should be noted that, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the break effect is completed, the normal background image light emission data table is used again to perform light emission in the mode corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). will be

As shown in FIGS. 59, 63(A), 63(B), 45, and 46, as the background change effect A of the success pattern, first, as a preceding operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. is displayed, and an image in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (previous stage operation period). The crack is displayed for 2000 ms from the end timing of the previous action (character action) (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 63B, the 2000 ms crack display period is composed of a 1000 ms pre-crack display period and a 1000 ms post-crack display period after the pre-crack display period. . Among these, in the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the pre-crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. A small fragment image 006SG302A that is smaller in size than is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when it comes time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) displayed until then is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 46). reference). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the background change effect A of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302 during the whiteout display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 2000ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A in the success pattern has transparency, and other images (for example, the background image) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment image 006SG302 images, etc.) can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in the background change effect A in the success pattern, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the above-described crack front stage display period (cracking A character voice corresponding to the action of the character is output along with the sound output period), and over 2500 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Cracking production sound output period). The crack effect sound in the background change effect A is a sound exclusively for the background change effect A, which is the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image. During 1000ms of the output period of 2500ms, the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to the chance background image are output. After that, a sound effect is continuously output for 1500 ms to notify that the background image has been switched to the chance background image. Moreover, although the crack sound output period is set to 500 ms, it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or the sound may be output according to the progress of the crack over 2000 ms. Further, the motion effect sound is output over 100 ms corresponding to the motion effect display period, overlapping the cracking sound. The motion effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound, and the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the motion effect sound is output. After the output of , the cracking sound can be heard.

Furthermore, with respect to the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image light emission data table until the start timing of the crack display period, the white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Emission data for the crack display period mainly for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light for 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display period to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the table, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the display of the crack. Furthermore, over 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for the crack effect (white-out 1000 ms), the white color is displayed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect. Light emission, mainly light emission, is performed. After the light emission in the manner corresponding to the breaking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the chance background image, the white light emission is mainly performed in the manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). and does not emit light. In the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the game effect lamp 9 emits white light with high brightness for 500 ms corresponding to the first period of white-out display, and for 500 ms corresponding to the latter period of white-out display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light alternately between high luminance and low luminance. Although an example in which the normal background image light emission data table is used in the preceding stage operation period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the light emission data table. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character shown in FIG. 45(D). , the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. In this way, before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, sharpness is generated. The effect can be further enhanced. The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are both light emission data tables that emit light mainly in white light. 1000 ms) white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed. White light emission is intended to be performed without blinking patterns.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the character display in the display area of the image display device 5 as the preceding operation is not performed in the background change effect A in the failure pattern. That is, in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed, so the split effect is not executed, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is continuously displayed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 45(B) and 45(C), although the effect of whether or not the character is displayed is performed, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. An image emission data table is used.

As shown in FIGS. 59, 64(A), and 47, as the background change effect B of the success pattern, first, in the display area of the image display device 5, the crack of the first stage is displayed over 3000 ms. (First stage crack display period). In the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period. be done.

Further, from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed in a wider area in the display area of the image display device 5 than the first stage crack display period over 1500 ms. (second stage crack display period). Also in the second stage crack display period, the small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the start timing of the second stage crack display period to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, continues for 200 ms. displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage crack display period have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. While the size and number of each pod fragment image is designed to be different, the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same, so it will be displayed in a common downward frame-out. It's becoming

Next, when it comes time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that has been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 47). reference). Further, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the background change effect A of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302 during the whiteout display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player in 750 ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B in the success pattern has transparency, and other images (for example, the background image) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment image 006SG302 image, etc.) can be visually recognized by the player.

Also, in the background change effect B in the success pattern, the first stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the first stage crack display period. (First stage cracking sound output period), the second cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the second crack display period (2 stage crack sound output period), and for 150 ms from the timing of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (crack effect sound output period). Note that the cracking effect sound in the background change effect B is a sound exclusively for the background change effect B, which is the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image. During 1000ms of the output period of 1250ms, the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to the chance background image are output. After that, for 250 ms, a sound effect is continuously output to notify that the background image has been switched to the chance background image. In addition, the volume related to the crack in the background change effect B may be the loudest cracking effect sound, and the first stage cracking sound and the second stage cracking sound may be the same volume, or the second stage cracking sound may be the same volume. may be louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Further, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the normal background image light emission data table until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and over 1000 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for breaking effect (white-out 1000 ms), Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect. After the light emission is completed in the manner corresponding to the break effect, the light emission is performed in the manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the light emission data table for the chance background image. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 64(B) and 64(C), the background change effect B in the failure pattern 1 is the crack of the first stage over 1500 ms and the crack of the outer first stage over 200 ms. Although the small fragment image corresponding to the display is displayed, the crack in the second stage is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is an effect pattern in which the glass plate image is not broken. The first-stage crack and the small fragment image are displayed over 200 ms, and the second-stage crack is displayed over 1500 ms from the timing when 1500 ms has passed in the first-stage crack display period, and the second-stage crack is displayed over 200 ms. Although a small fragment image corresponding to the crack is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301A is an effect pattern that does not crack. Since the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break in the background change effect B in these failure patterns, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 59, 65, and 48, as the pseudo-continuous effect, first, in the display area of the image display device 5, a "left" decorative symbol, a "right" decorative symbol, and a "middle" decorative symbol are displayed. Temporarily stop in the order of Then, the crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is the "medium" decoration symbol, is stopped (crack display period). During the crack display period, the movable body 32 is dropped for 1500 ms as a pre-stage operation (movable body drop period). When the falling motion of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms elapses), it is time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is to be noted that cracks during the crack display period of the pseudo-continuous effect and cracks during the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to be cracked differently. For example, the crack in the background change effect A is displayed in a manner in which the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301 progresses step by step over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. The crack is displayed in a manner in which the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks at once.

Next, when the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A comes, display of the fragment image 006SG302 is performed for 1000 ms from the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). Therefore, in the pseudo continuous effect of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the white-out image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It has become. On the other hand, during 500 ms of the white-out display latter period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible.

Note that, over 3000 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (crack effect sound output period). Note that the cracking effect sound in the pseudo-continuous effect is a sound exclusively for the pseudo-continuous effect, and includes the sound effect of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. It is a composed sound, and the sound effect of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 are output over 1000ms of the output period of 3000ms, and then output for 2000ms. The sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is continuously output over the period. After that, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. - 特許庁Further, the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position over a period of 3000 ms from the end timing of the white-out display latter period, that is, the display end timing of the fragment image 006G302 (movable body rising period).

Further, for the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image can be obtained by using the normal background image light emission data table or the chance background image light emission data table until the crack display start timing. Light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the display of the image (second background image 006SG082), and the crack display is performed for 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the light emission data table, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the crack display. Then, over 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for the crack effect (white-out 1000 ms), the white color is displayed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect. Light emission, mainly light emission, is performed. After the light emission in the mode corresponding to the breaking effect is completed, the mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed is used for 2000 ms by using the light emission data table for the pseudo continuous effect according to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Light emission is performed at For example, when the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is caused to emit green light in response to the execution of the first pseudo-continuous effect, and when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the second pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in red according to the execution of the effect. After the light emission is completed in a mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is generated by using the normal background image light emission data table or the chance background image light emission data table again. ) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed. The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are both light emission data tables that emit light mainly in white light. 1000 ms) white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed. White light emission is intended to be performed without blinking patterns.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 65, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect according to the present embodiment have different crack display periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the length of the crack display period may be the same between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIGS. 59, 66(A), 49, and 50, as the reach-indicating effect of the success pattern, first, as the preceding operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed. is an image acting on the "left" decorative design display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image acting on the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and a "middle" decorative design in the glass plate image 006SG301. Images acting on the display area 5C are sequentially displayed over 10000 ms (previous stage operation period). During the preceding stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative design display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, the crack is displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L for 8000 ms ( Left crack display period), and further, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the crack is displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R for 4000ms. (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decoration pattern display area 5L for 100 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period. A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of cracking the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the “right” decoration pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302 smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken is displayed. A fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative design display area 5R for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative design display area 5R differ from each other as shown in FIG. Since the values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters are different, the speed of scattering, the size and number of each small fragment image are different, but the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same. Therefore, it is commonly displayed in a downward frame-out.

When the character acts on the "middle" decorative design display area 5C of the glass plate image 006SG301 during the previous stage action period and the preceding action period ends, it is time to break the glass plate image 006SG301A. When the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A comes, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that has been displayed at that timing becomes the normal reach background corresponding to the normal reach effect. image is updated. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the reach suggestive effect of the success pattern of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and visually recognizes the fragment image 006SG302 in the whiteout display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. has become impossible. On the other hand, the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player during 1500ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing of the end of the white-out display latter period, for example, the decoration pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner temporarily to inform the player that the decoration pattern has reached the ready-to-win position. It is performed over (decorative design highlight display period).

It should be noted that the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the reach suggestion effect in the success pattern has transparency, and other images (for example, background image etc.) can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in the reach suggestion effect in the success pattern, the left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period (left crack A first character voice corresponding to the first effect action of the character is output along with the cracking sound output period), and the right crack display period is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period. A crack sound is output (right crack sound output period), and a second character voice corresponding to the second effect action of the character is output. , and 8R, the cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output (breaking effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestive effect (success pattern) is a sound exclusively for the reach suggestive effect, and the reach effect is achieved by temporarily enlarging and displaying the sound effect of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and the decorative pattern. It is a sound composed including a sound effect of highlighting the decoration pattern for notifying the player that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 1000ms out of the 3000ms output period. The sound effect for highlighting is output together with the broken sound effect, and then the sound effect for highlighting is continuously output for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. Further, when an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output. It is used both when it is displayed around and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative design display area 5R.

Furthermore, with respect to the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image is used until the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Alternatively, light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a mode according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and in 1000 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period By using the light emission data table for the break effect (whiteout of 1000 ms), light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the break effect. After the end of light emission in a mode corresponding to the break effect, light emission not mainly of white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the ready-to-win suggestion effect in the failure pattern is performed by displaying a character in the display area of the image display device 5 and displaying the character in the "left" decorative pattern display area as a pre-stage operation. The image acting on 5L, the image acting on the "right" decorative design display area 5R, and the image acting on the "middle" decorative design display area 5C are sequentially displayed over 14000 ms (previous operation period). During the preceding stage operation period, a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L for 12000 ms from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative design display area 5L (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative design display area 5R, a crack is displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R for 8000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decoration pattern display area 5L for 100 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period. A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of cracking the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the “right” decoration pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302 smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken is displayed. A fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative design display area 5R for 200 ms. The small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the successful pattern. , the player cannot determine whether the pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern.

In addition, in the failure pattern reach suggestion effect, the left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period (left crack sound output period), the right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggesting effect of the success pattern (timing 10000 has passed since the start of the reach suggesting effect of the failure pattern), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over 1000 ms. (whiteout display period). The white-out display period is a period during which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are rendered invisible to the player by displaying the white-out image 006SG303. When an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output. It is used both when it is displayed around and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative design display area 5R.

It should be noted that, in the ready-to-reach indication effect of the failure pattern, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the chance background image is displayed until the start timing of the white-out display period. After the execution of light emission in a manner corresponding to the display of the (second background image 006SG082), in the white-out display period, white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the white-out image 006SG303 using the white-out light emission data table. Light emission, mainly light emission, is performed. Then, from the timing of the end of the white-out display period, white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the notification that the ready-to-win state is not achieved (that the ready-to-win effect is a failure pattern) using the light emission data table for failure notification. is performed. It should be noted that the light emission in the mode corresponding to the notifying that the reach does not occur (that the ready-reach suggesting effect is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. Note that the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the light emission data table for whiteout, and the light emission data table for failure notification are all light emission data tables that mainly emit white light. , White light emission based on the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed including a blinking pattern in which high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission are alternately performed. White light emission based on the light emission data table and the failure notification light emission data table is executed without including a blinking pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the failure notification light data table (until the variable display is terminated by stopping the variable display), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output the effect sound.

As shown in FIGS. 60, 67, and 51, as a weak development effect, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation, and the character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The image acting on the central part is displayed for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). In addition, although the preceding operation period is set to 4000 ms, a pattern of the preceding operation period (2000 ms) is separately provided, and when it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high, the pattern of the preceding stage operation period (4000 ms) is used. It may be determined at a high rate that the pattern of the preceding stage operation period (2000 ms) is used to execute the weak development effect.

Next, when it comes time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of the normal reach that has been displayed at that timing is changed to the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect (background effect image 006SG322). , and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). Therefore, in the weak development production of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the white-out image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It has become. On the other hand, during 3000ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that has been displayed at that timing is updated to the super reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α. be.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect does not have transparency, and other images (for example, a background image, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment image 006SG302. The player is invisible. The fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302. In a certain 3500 ms, display is performed in a transmissive mode with transparency (for example, a transmittance of 70% or more) for 1500 ms after the display is started, and then gradually becomes non-transmissive with no transparency over 1000 ms It changes to a mode (for example, a transmittance of 70% to 10%), and then displays in a non-transmissive mode (for example, a transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, over 1000 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (crack effect sound output period). In addition to the break effect sound, a weak development sound effect is also output for 3500 ms from the break timing. It should be noted that the crack effect sound is louder than the weak development effect sound, and thus is a sound that is easily recognized by the player.

Further, as for the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the multi-reach background image, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image until the start timing of the preceding stage operation. During the 4000 ms from the start timing of the preceding stage operation to the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, light emission data table for light development effect is used to emit light not mainly white light in a mode corresponding to the light development effect. is performed, and over 1000 ms from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period, by using the light emission data table for breaking effect (white-out 1000 ms), in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect Mainly white light emission is performed, and for 2500 ms from the end timing of the white-out display period to the end timing of the fragment image display period, the light development effect light table is used again to perform the light development effect. Light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to. It should be noted that, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the breaking effect is completed, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) is obtained by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image. Light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed at .

In addition, in the weak development effect of the present embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image from the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. When the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303 on the image display device 5, the weak development effect background image is superimposed. The update to the reach α background image may be made difficult or invisible to the player. When displaying the white-out image 006SG303 on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image in this way, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the light emission data table for whiteout. Note that the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed at a timing before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500 ms before the end). , the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started.

As shown in FIGS. 60, 68, and 52, as the strong development effect A, first, as a pre-stage action, the movable body 32 is dropped for 1000 ms (movable body drop period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1000 ms has passed), it is time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A.

Next, when the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A comes, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α that had been displayed at that timing is changed to the strong development effect A. is updated to the strong development effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to , and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

Further, after the white-out image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 1500 ms from the falling timing of the movable body 32 (white-out display early period), the white-out display early period A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the strong development effect A of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the whiteout display initial period of 1500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 500 ms of the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Note that the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A has transparency, and other images (for example, a background image, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment image 006SG302. It is visible to the player.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect A background image corresponding to the strong development effect A that has been displayed at that timing becomes the super reach β background image corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β. Updated. The movable body 32 that has fallen as the preceding operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period, and the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position over 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period. (movable body rising period). From the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (the timing when the movable body rises), the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the strong development effect A (strong development effect A effect sound) over 2500 ms. will be In addition, in the strong development effect A, unlike the weak development effect, etc., the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A is not output. Also, a sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A in the strong development effect A may be output. The output of sound effects may be restricted.

As for the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image is used until the falling timing of the movable body 32, so that the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) can be displayed. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a corresponding manner, and the light emission data table for strong development effect A is used over 2500 ms from the timing when the movable body 32 starts falling to the end timing of the fragment image display period. Light emission other than white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the strong development effect A. From the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (the end timing of the fragment image display period), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be displayed by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image. Emission that is not predominantly white light emission is performed in a corresponding manner.

In addition, in the strong development effect A of the present embodiment, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the whiteout display initial period over 1500 ms from the falling timing of the movable body 32, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the white-out display initial period of the strong development effect A may be a period in which the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

As shown in FIGS. 60, 69, 53, and 54, as the strong development effect B, first, a crack is generated in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without the action of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. It is displayed (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, since the small fragment image 006SG302A in the strong development effect B and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestive effect etc. have different parameter values of “intensity” and “repetition” shown in FIG. Each one is designed to be different in size and number.

When 1500 ms elapses and the crack display period ends, it is time to crack the glass plate image 006SG301A. When the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A comes, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α that has been displayed at that timing corresponds to the strong development effect B. It is updated to strong development production B. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). For this reason, in the strong development effect B of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the whiteout display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 2500ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B has transparency, and other images (for example, a background image, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment image 006SG302. It is visible to the player. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is displayed in a slow motion mode after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development effect B that has been displayed at that timing corresponds to the reach effect of the super reach β. The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is updated. In addition, in the strong development effect B, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period (cracking sound output period). From the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the end timing of the fragment image display period, a sound corresponding to the strong development effect B (strong development effect B effect sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 3000 ms. In addition, in the strong development production B, unlike the weak development production, etc., the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A is not output, so that the crack production unique to the strong development production B can be enjoyed. Also, a sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A in the strong development production B may be output. The output of sound effects may be restricted.

Furthermore, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the start timing of the crack display. Light emission, which is not mainly white light emission, is performed in this mode, and the light emission data table for strong development effect B is used over 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to B, and light emission for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is performed over 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period. By using the data table, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the crack effect, and the light emission is strong over 2000 ms from the end timing of the white-out display period to the end timing of the fragment image display period. By using the light emission data table for the development effect B, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the strong development effect B. It should be noted that after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the strong development effect B is completed, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is obtained by using the light emission data table for the super reach B background image. Light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed at .

In addition, in the strong development effect B of the present embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image from the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 as an example. However, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image, the image display device 5 displays the white-out image 006SG303 to display the strong development effect B The update from the background image to the super reach β background image may be made invisible or invisible to the player. When the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image in this way, when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the light emission data table for whiteout. In this case, both the light emission data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000 ms) is performed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the white-out light emission data table is executed. Light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern. Also, although the crack display period of the strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the break timing. For example, the crack may be displayed such that the crack gradually expands at the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing between the start timing of the super reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in FIGS. 60, 70, and 55, as the cut-in effect, first, as the operation promoting effect, an operation promoting effect prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (during which the operation prompting effect is executed). In particular, the operation prompting image during the execution period of the operation prompting effect of the present embodiment is displayed as a pre-operation state image in which the push button 31B is projected before being operated by the player (pre-operation state image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to the end timing of the cut-in effect (over 5000 ms from the breaking timing), the suggestive image corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed, and the above-described fragment is displayed for 500 ms. After the white-out image 006SG303 for hiding the image 006SG302 from the player is displayed (white-out display initial period), the white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the white-out display initial period is displayed for 500 ms. (later period of white-out display). For this reason, in the cut-in effect of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the white-out image 006SG303 and can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image during the white-out display period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 2000 ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image can be visually recognized by the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect has transparency, and other images (for example, a background image, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be viewed through the fragment image 006SG302. is visible to a person. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed in a slow motion mode after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the push button 31B is displayed as an after-operation mode image, which is the state after the player has operated the push button 31B, for 1000 ms (post-operation mode image display period). Since the post-operation mode image is an image displayed with priority over the white-out image 006SG303, the player can visually recognize the operation mode image for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. .

In addition, in the cut-in effect, the cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cut-in effect sound output period). . In the cut-in effect, unlike the weak development effect, etc., the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A is not output. Also, a sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A may be output in the cut-in production. Output may be limited.

Furthermore, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in this mode, and the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used for 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the white-out display latter period. By using the light emission data table for the cut-in effect, the light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a mode corresponding to the break effect, and the cut-in effect light emission data table is used from the end timing of the white-out display latter period to the end timing of the suggestive image display period. By using , light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the cut-in effect. After the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cut-in effect ends, the super reach β background image light emission data table is used again to display the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). Light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed at .

As shown in FIGS. 60, 71(A), 56, and 57, as a result notification effect of the success pattern, first, as a pre-stage operation, the movable body 32 is dropped over 500 ms (movable resistance). fall period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms has passed), a crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 500 ms (crack display period). During this crack display period, the action effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the crack display period, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. A small fragment image 006SG302A with a smaller size is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion effect etc. have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. It is designed so that the speed and the size and number of each small fragment image are different. In addition, since the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (failure pattern) have different parameter values of "intensity" and "repetition", the scattering speed and the small fragments Each image is designed to have different sizes and numbers.

Next, when it comes to the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α that has been displayed at that timing or the super reach β The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach effect is updated to the jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the debris continues for 1500 ms. An image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period). Although not particularly shown in FIG. 71(A), the big hit notification background image is displayed for 10000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and after 10000 ms (the variable display stop timing of the variable display) ), the background image is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and then updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game state from the variable display stop timing of the variable display.

In addition, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display initial period), the whiteout display is performed. A white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that in the previous period is displayed for 500 ms (white-out display latter period). Therefore, in the result notification effect of the success pattern of the present embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and visually recognizes the fragment image 006SG302 in the whiteout display initial period of 500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 1000ms including the whiteout display latter period after the whiteout display initial period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the result notification effect in the success pattern has transparency, and other images (for example, background image) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment image 006SG302. etc.) can be visually recognized by the player.

It should be noted that the rising of the movable body 32 to the initial position is performed over 1500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (movable body rising period).

In addition, in the result notification effect in the success pattern, a big hit confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 1500 ms from the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A to notify that the big hit is confirmed (jackpot confirmation sound output period). In the result notification effect (success pattern), unlike the weak development effect, etc., the sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A is not output, so that it is possible to suitably notify that the big win is confirmed. Also, in the result notification effect (success pattern), a sound effect of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A may be output. The output of sound effects may be restricted.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, until the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the super reach α background image ( Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the weak S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and white out from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A Over 1000 ms until the end timing of the display latter period, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the break effect by using the light emission data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the light emission in the manner corresponding to the breaking performance is completed, the light emission is performed in the manner corresponding to the display of the big win notification background image by using the light emission data table for the big win notification background image. From the stop timing of the variable display, by using the jackpot game light emission data table, light emission mainly of rainbow color emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the jackpot game background image.

As shown in FIG. 71(B), in the result notification effect in the failure pattern, the display of the falling of the movable body 32 and the crack caused by the falling of the movable body 32 is not performed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks in the success pattern. From the timing, the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms (crack display period). In addition, from the start timing of the crack display period, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) or the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, can be changed. It is an image indicating that the display result is a failure, and is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image. The display of the deviation notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, and is updated to a color eye-catching image at the end of the crack display period. Note that the display period of the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the end of the display period of the eye-catching image, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) having the same color as the eye-catching image is displayed. is started. That is, in the result notification effect of the failure pattern in the present embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying the monochrome error notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (first background image) are displayed. 006SG081) is displayed.

In addition, in the result notification effect in the failure pattern, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over 500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period (crack effect sound output period).

As for the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image is used until the start timing of the crack display period. S-reach effect image 006SG088) and super-reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) are emitted in a manner that does not mainly emit white light, and the variable display stops from the start timing of the crack display period. However, at the timing, by using the light emission data table for the error notification background image, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the error notification background image. From the timing when the variable display is stopped, by using the normal background image light emission data table, light emission that does not mainly emit white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). . The light emission data table for the break effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the discrepancy notification background image are both light emission data tables that mainly emit white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for out 1000 ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas white light emission data table for white-out is performed. White light emission is intended to be performed without blinking patterns.

In addition, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestive effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, a mode in which the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302) was exemplified, but the present invention is The display is not limited to this, and the white-out image 006SG303 in each effect may start to be displayed at a timing before the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Fragment speed during execution of cracking effect)
Next, the above-described first continuous cracking effect, second continuous cracking effect, dialog announcement effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development The display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed when the crack effect is executed as the effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), among these effects, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. The fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed during execution of the effect, the strong development effect A, and the crack effect as the result notification effect is displayed over the fragment image display period including the white-out display early period and the white-out display late period. It is designed to move and display at a constant speed V1 (normal motion).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed during the execution of the strong development effect B and the crack effect as the cut-in effect is the white-out display period and the white-out display period. During the period of 1000 ms between the latter period and the latter period, the moving display is performed at a speed V1, while during the fragment image display period after the latter period of the white-out display (2000 ms for the strong development effect B, 1500 ms for the cut-in effect). , and is moved and displayed at a speed V0 (slow motion), which is lower than the speed V1. FIG. 72 shows the strong development effect B and the cut-in effect as effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the speed V0. The fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed at a speed of V0, and when it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect B and the strong development effect A is displayed at a speed V1. At a high rate, it is decided to move and display at the speed V0.

(Details of cracking effect)
Next, the details of the crack effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a break pattern in the break effect. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display example of each crack pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 , in the crack effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined break timing, some kind of image is drawn from the rear side approximately in the center position of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. Cracking is initiated in a setting where an impact (force) is applied, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that mimic at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed. The image is displayed as an animation. That is, the crack effect is a effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area is changed to the fragment image 006SG302, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a crack mode (fragment mode). In this embodiment, cracking is initiated when a ball collides with the substantially central position of the glass plate image 006SG301A from the rear side.

The animation display in which the glass plate is broken and the fragment images are scattered is actually composed of still images (for example, about 30 to 100 frames) corresponding to the fragment image display period, but in FIG. Five frames of still images are extracted from a plurality of still images constituting the fragment image cracking animation display from the start to the end of the animation and arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 74, the five-frame images of each crack pattern are not consecutive five-frame images, but a plurality of frame fragment images (not shown) are actually arranged between the respective frames.

There are various cracking modes when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks, and a plurality of types of cracking patterns (for example, cracking patterns A to G) are preset, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect according to the type of effect to be executed. A crack effect can be executed based on a preset crack pattern.

Specifically, split pattern A is a pattern corresponding to background change effect A and reach suggestive effect, split pattern B is a pattern corresponding to background change effect B and strong development effect B, and split pattern C is , a pattern corresponding to a simulated continuous effect and a result notification effect (big hit), a crack pattern D is a pattern corresponding to a first continuous crack effect, a second continuous crack effect, and a dialogue announcement effect, and a crack pattern E is a pattern corresponding to The pattern corresponds to the weak development effect, the split pattern F corresponds to the strong development effect A, and the break pattern G corresponds to the cut-in effect.

Each of the crack patterns A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one or more of the items of "action subject", "crack mode", "crack range", and "fragment image display mode". Note that the display period, display timing, and the like are the same as those described with reference to FIGS.

The "acting subject" indicates the acting subject with respect to the glass plate image 006SG301A. Breaking patterns A and E perform cracking effects according to the actions of the "character", and cracking patterns C and F are actions of the "movable body". The breaking effect is executed according to the breaking patterns B and D, and the breaking effect is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the action subject. The "crack mode" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to the crack mode before it cracks. For crack patterns A to D, the crack effect is executed after the "crack mode" is displayed. For E to G, the crack effect is executed without displaying the "crack mode". The "crack mode" includes a plurality of types of modes having different display positions on the display screen, the number of displays, crack shapes, and the like. The “crack range” is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and crack patterns A to C and E to G are “whole” of the display screen, and crack pattern D is “partial”. The "fragment image display mode" indicates whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent mode. A part of the crack pattern B and the crack pattern E are "non-transparent", and the other crack patterns are "transparent". .

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the near-center position of the display screen. Therefore, the “non-transmissive” fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area. , the angle of incidence of the irradiation light on the glass surface is large such as 45 degrees to 90 degrees). (for example, a small angle at which the incident angle of the irradiation light to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), the light is reflected and is difficult to transmit, so it becomes difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area (Fig. 83 reference). For example, of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then , in moving and displaying a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the first angle. The type, intensity, color, up/down/left/right position, depth position, etc. of this light can also be changed in various settings, and the setting values relating to the light may be changed according to the crack pattern.

Moreover, the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed by breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A includes a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 having different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, and the like. In addition, each fragment image 006SG302 rotates in various directions at various speeds and moves in various directions during the display period from the start of display to the end of display and the disappearance of display. Specifically, it is displayed by moving in the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), by moving in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and by moving in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction). Some are displayed in a manner of moving toward , while others have different movement speeds, rotation speeds, number of rotations, display periods, and the like. Regarding the movement direction, not only one of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, but also multiple-axis directions among the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis (for example, XY-axis direction, XY-axis direction, etc.) Including those that move towards.

In other words, each of the crack patterns A to G, in addition to the above items of "action subject", "crack mode", "crack range", and "fragment image display mode", is at least a part of the plurality when the fragment image 006SG302 scatters. The shape, size, rotation speed, number of rotations, movement direction [X-axis (horizontal direction), Y-axis (vertical direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)] of the fragment image 006SG302, movement speed, display mode such as display period At least one of them has a different pattern.

Further, the crack patterns A to G are, for example, animations of cracks created using the shutter function of predetermined animation creation software, and the created crack patterns A to G are based on the following parameters. At least some of the parameter values are different.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in FIG. 73, “Gravity” can be set for gravity, and can adjust the acceleration at which scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant, but gradually accelerates downward. "Gravity direction" can set the direction in which gravity is applied, and can specify up, down, left, and right directions with 0 degrees (upward direction) as a reference. The "gravitational gradient" can adjust the gravity in the Z-axis direction (front-rear direction), and the numerical value set by this parameter is combined with the "direction of gravity". It is possible to designate all the directions of the 3D space such as front and back, up and down, left and right. It should be noted that the values of "-90" and "90" correspond to the Z-axis direction, so the "direction of gravity" is substantially invalidated. "Strength" can adjust the momentum of the scattered fragments, and the higher the value, the faster the scattered fragments. "Variation amount" can be adjusted how much the size of the fragment affects the animation, and in the real world it usually takes more energy to move a large heavy object under the same physical impact. Therefore, when the same impact is applied, the smaller ones move and rotate faster, and the larger and heavier ones slow down. You can adjust the difference in physical animation depending on the size of the fragment from 0 to 100%. At 0%, the size and weight are not taken into consideration, so small and large fragments will move in the same way. Note that the default setting of 30% is a value close to the laws of physics in the natural world. "Repeat" allows you to adjust the size of the broken pieces, and if you increase the value, each piece will become smaller and the number of pieces will increase. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of the fragments, and increasing the value speeds up the time it takes for the movement and rotation speed to stop due to the resistance. In addition, the fall speed is slowed down because the resistance is applied to the gravity as if it were attached to the sticky substance. That is, if you adjust the value of Viscosity to a large value, the movement of the fragments will be slow motion. FIG. 73 shows crack pattern B, crack pattern E, and crack pattern F as crack patterns in which the value of "viscosity" is adjusted to be larger than normal. "Viscosity" value is adjusted larger than usual.

The above parameters are just an example. In addition to the above, the "force" indicating the force applied at the moment when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and the "position "Depth" that can adjust the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "Rotation speed" that can set the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, Randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302 may be settable such as "randomness".

Next, the main features of the movement (mainly the scattering mode) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern will be briefly described.

For example, in the crack patterns A, C to F, the numerical value of the "gravitational direction" is set to "180°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters so as to spread to the surroundings, and then naturally downwards. On the other hand, in the crack patterns B and G, the numerical value of the "direction of gravity" is set to "0°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks and spreads around, Compared to the crack patterns A and C to F, this mode is less likely to fall downward.

In this way, the crack patterns A, C to F (first pattern) and the crack patterns B, G (second pattern) have different "gravity direction" settings, so that the crack patterns A, C to F are " 180°”, so that the moving direction of the fragment image 006SG302 is different. By doing so, various patterns can be constructed, and interest is improved.

In addition, in the crack patterns A, C to F, the numerical value of the "fluctuation amount" is set to "30%", so that the small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, and the large heavy fragment image 006SG302 On the other hand, in the crack patterns B and G, the numerical value of "variation" is set to "0%", so that the fragment image 006SG302 has the same aspect regardless of small fragments and large fragments. Therefore, it is considered to be a crack pattern with a high degree of animation.

In other words, the crack patterns A, C to F are affected by animation differently depending on their sizes. Crack patterns B and G are affected by animation in the same way regardless of their size, so they fly in the same way and fall in the same way. can be selected.

In addition, the crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and the crack patterns D to F (second patterns) have the same setting for the "direction of gravity" but different settings for the "value of gravity". The speed at which 006SG302 falls is different. In this way, by varying the value of the "gravitational value" of the parameter and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, various patterns can be constructed, which enhances interest. More specifically, since crack patterns D to F have larger numerical values, the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302 is faster.

In addition, the fracture patterns A to C, E, and G have the numerical value of "Gravity Gradient" set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while moving in the Z direction. On the other hand, crack patterns D and F are displayed as if they move in the axial direction, that is, toward the front side. 006SG302 is displayed without moving in the Z-axis direction only by moving in the X-axis direction or the Y-axis direction. In the crack patterns A to C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving toward the near side, the fragment image is displayed in a manner of gradually enlarging. You can emphasize that you are getting closer. In particular, crack patterns B and G have the numerical value of "Gravity Gradient" set to "90", so that the fragment image is displayed in such a manner that it moves further to the front.

In addition, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common among the crack pattern A (first pattern), the crack pattern B (second pattern), and the crack pattern C (third pattern). The second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, the first parameter is fixed, and a common part is created for the fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

Further, the crack pattern E (first pattern), the crack pattern F (second pattern), and the crack pattern G (third pattern) are, for example, the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the crack pattern F (second pattern). , the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, the second parameter of "strength" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, and the crack pattern F ( 2nd pattern) and cracking pattern G (third pattern) differ in that the first parameter of “gravity” is “5” for cracking pattern E and “2” for cracking pattern F, and the second parameter of “strength” is "5" is common. In this manner, each pattern forms a common portion of the fragment image 006SG302 and is composed of different parameters, thereby constructing a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image 006SG302.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a plurality of break patterns A to G with different numerical values for various parameters are stored in advance, and break effects are executed based on break patterns A to G corresponding to the types of effects to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the determined effect In addition to determining the numerical values of various parameters according to the type of glass and the degree of expectation of a big hit, etc., it is possible to create cracking animation data based on the determined numerical values, and display an animation display in which the glass plate breaks based on the created cracking animation data. may be

(Display example of crack pattern)
Next, details of display examples of the crack patterns A to G will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a display example of crack pattern A with a white-out image and without a white-out image. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a white-out image in crack pattern B. FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a white-out image in crack pattern C. FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a display example of crack pattern D with a white-out image and without a white-out image. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a white-out image in crack pattern E. FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a display example of crack pattern F with a white-out image and without a white-out image. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a display example of a crack pattern G with a white-out image and without a white-out image.

In each of FIGS. 75 to 81, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying the white-out image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are shown in (A1) to (A5). It is a corresponding image, but is a display example of the crack pattern of the aspect which does not display the white-out image 006SG303. In other words, it is a diagram for comparing the case where the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed and the case where it is not displayed at the start of the breaking effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), In (A4), the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is 100%.

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of FIGS. 75 to 81, in the animation display in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the glass plate image 006SG301A is placed at approximately the center position of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the frame (for example, (B1)) where the break starts. Since the setting is such that cracking is started by applying an impact (force) such that a sphere collides from the rear side, scattering is started from the fragment image 006SG302 near the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A. 006SG302 has yet to start scattering. That is, at the stage when the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed on the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the breaking timing begins to change into a broken state, a large number of glass plate images 006SG301A fill almost the entire display screen. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the image displayed in the display layer image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 is almost invisible.

Therefore, at the start timing of the crack effect, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed so as to fill almost the entire display screen over several frames changes to a cracked state, and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed. Since it is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image that was displayed before the break effect was started. In particular, as in crack patterns A to D, it is still good if the crack effect is started after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner, but as in crack patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed. When the crack effect is suddenly started without being displayed in the crack mode, the display screen is suddenly displayed so as to erase the image that was displayed before the crack effect was started. Since the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed into a cracked state and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, there is a possibility that the player may be given an unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the start of cracking, as shown in the white-out display period of (A1), the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 to hide many fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, it is possible to reduce discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in the white-out display latter period of (A2) and (A3), the white-out image 006SG303 is not suddenly hidden, but is faded out and the transmittance is gradually increased so that the fragment Since the image 006SG302 can be visually recognized after being separated from the center of the display screen to the periphery to some extent, the appearance of the fragment image 006SG302 breaking and scattering can be naturally shown without discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 75, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 75(B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) (see FIG. 75 (B2)), the is framed out from the lower side (see FIGS. 75(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 76, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. After scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) (see FIG. 76 (B2)), downward Since it is hard to fall down, it moves radially in slow motion from the center and is displayed out of frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 76(B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 77, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 77B1), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., left-right direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., up-down direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) (see FIG. 77 (B2)), the is framed out from the lower side (see FIGS. 77(B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, the common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when the pseudo-continuous effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cut-in effect are executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly illustrated, for example, background images may be displayed in different display modes according to the type of presentation.

As shown in FIG. 78, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 78B1), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, right direction) or Y-axis direction (for example, left direction) (see FIG. 78 (B2)), it falls downward and is displayed out of frame mainly from the bottom side (see FIG. 78(B2)). 78 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 79, in crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. After scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) (see FIG. 79 (B2)), slow motion movement , and is framed out mainly from the bottom side (see FIGS. 79(B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", but this is a value corresponding to FIGS. The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 79 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". In addition, in FIG. 79B1, the movable body 32 is intentionally not shown in order to make it easier to see the start of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, the fragment image 006SG302 in the split pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from FIG. A super reach α effect may be performed by moving in slow motion so as to be visible to the player and whitening out while being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., rightward direction) or Y-axis direction (e.g., leftward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 80 (B2)), it falls downward in slow motion and becomes the main is framed out from the lower side (see FIGS. 80(B3) to (B5)). Also, since the small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, it falls first and is framed out, whereas the large heavy fragment image 006SG302 is slow and is framed out after the small fragment image 006SG302.

Also, when a crack effect occurs during the strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern on the upper right of the display screen in the reach mode is temporarily hidden, and when the fragment image 006SG302 in the crack effect is hidden, it is displayed again. By doing so, it is possible to omit the display that has little relation to the cracking effect as much as possible, and to enhance the effect of the cracking effect. In addition, not only the strong S reach effect, but also when a crack effect occurs during execution of another reach effect such as a weak S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern in the reach mode is temporarily hidden, and the fragment image in the crack effect is displayed. 006SG302 may be displayed again when it is hidden.

As shown in FIG. 81, in crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area begins to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. After scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) (see FIG. 81 (B2)), downward Since it is hard to fall down, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed out of frame from the upper, lower, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 81(B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", but this is a value corresponding to FIGS. The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 81 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(details of fragment image)
Next, details of the fragment image will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in (A) in a pseudo continuous effect and (B) in a cut-in effect. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing fragment images displayed in background change effect A in (A) and in strong development effect B in (B). It should be noted that the fragment image indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 83 indicates that the image has been hidden.

As shown in FIG. 82(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect is in a non-transmissive mode (for example, the transmittance 0%), on the other hand, as shown in FIG. Since the image is in a transparent mode (for example, a transmittance of 100%), even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be suitably given, and the game interest can be enhanced. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized. (the background is transparent), the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (characters are transparent) that allows at least part of the character image 006SG307 (special image) to be recognized, and the third fragment The image 006SG302 is a transmissive image (the background and the characters are transparent) that allow recognition of both at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least part of the character image 006SG307. By making the display modes of the images different, it is possible to enhance the effect of each effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(A), all the fragment images 006SG302 among the fragment images in the background change effect A move downward on the display screen of the image display device 5 toward the outside of the display screen and are framed. 83(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is hidden on the display screen toward the outside of the display screen. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302 and is hidden in a frame-out display mode by moving up, down, left, and right, moves toward the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5. By hiding the fragment image 006SG302 in front, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed differently between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby enhancing interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at a first angle (for example, an angle in which the plane faces the front side), and the incident angle of the irradiation light with respect to the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees. degree), it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and the rotational operation causes the fragment image 006SG302 to be rotated to a second angle smaller than the first angle. (for example, a small angle at which the incident angle of the irradiation light with respect to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle in which the end surface faces the front side), at least one of the background images in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 It becomes difficult to recognize the part. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image is at the second angle. 006SG302 can be displayed to enhance the presentation effect.

(Effect of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbols and the decorative symbols are variably displayed. It is possible to control to a big hit game state that is advantageous for. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous cracking effect, and a dialogue announcement, which are effects suggesting control to a jackpot game state during the variable display. Control means for executing production, background change production A, background change production B, pseudo-continuous production, reach suggestive production, weak development production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, result notification production, etc. A CPU 120 for effect control is provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 draws images with different display priorities in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5. layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing area.

For example, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative patterns as a layer 2 image, and an object such as a character as a layer 3 image. A layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an image, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as a layer 4 image, and a glass plate image as a layer 5 image Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging fragment image 006SG301A and fragment image 006SG302 (such as broken glass), Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging motion effect image as layer 6 image, and white as layer 7 image A layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the out-image 006SG303, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompting image as a layer 8 image, and a variable display compatible display (hold display, Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging active display), small pattern (4th pattern), first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, right hitting notification image as layer 10 image It has a layer 10 image drawing area for Also, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

Except for the case where the layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, and the layer 9 image drawing is performed. The image drawn in the area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is the layer 9 image. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority on the display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5 more than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. It is an image with a low priority, and an image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Also, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, instead of the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background image (second background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be drawn, layer 1- In the three-image drawing area, a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) can be drawn. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. 5 has a low display priority.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different timings. Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the background change effect A includes a crack display period in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to display a crack, and a glass plate and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the image 006SG301 is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken in a period shorter than the background change effect by the operation of , and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, the background change effect A is displayed on the image display device 5 before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started. The strong development effect A is an effect in which the background image is different, and the strong development effect A is performed by the image display device 5 before the strong development effect A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is started. This is an effect that makes the background image displayed in . That is, in the present embodiment, the background change effect A that displays the crack and fragment image 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the intensity that displays the fragment image 006SG302 without displaying the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301. Since the development effect A can be executed at different timings, the player can be surprised at various timings. Since the types of background images displayed before and after the display are different, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions are preferably given to the player, and the interest in the game is heightened. be able to.

[Form 1-2]
Further, when the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is better when the background change effect A is not executed and the strong development effect A is executed. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the effect A is executed and the strong development effect A is executed (for example, see FIGS. 33 to 36). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution status of the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case of going through the background change effect A, the background change effect A , a case may be provided in which a different chance background fanning effect is passed (FIG. 30). Also, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the background change effect A, The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed by the background change effect A or the chance background stimulating effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
Further, when the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the strong development effect is better when the background change effect A is executed before the strong development effect A is executed. Before the execution of A, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background change effect A is not executed (for example, see FIGS. 33 to 36). By doing so, it is possible to enhance interest by making the player expect that both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A will be executed during one variable display.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in FIGS. 63 and 68, during the variable display, the background change effect A is a effect executed before the reach timing of the decoration pattern, and the strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decoration pattern. is. In addition, the image displayed as the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 includes the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) and the chance background image (first 2 background image 006SG082), a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a reach effect of super reach β is being executed and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) shown. The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). ), the player can be made to pay attention to the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A has transparency. At least part of the image (second background image 006SG082) can be recognized by the player, and the background image displayed in the strong development effect A does not have transparency. Since it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, the fragment image 006SG302 in these background change effects A display and the effect of strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, in the case of rotating the fragment image 006SG302, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to the first angle, the player can see at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. on the other hand, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to the second angle, it is difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. good. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, in the case of rotating the fragment image 006SG302, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle, The second fragment image 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 84, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves in a plurality of directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in the Z-axis direction is the X-axis image. The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the axial direction to become non-display in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-6]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, both the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A change in speed from the start of the display to the end of the display. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed without being accompanied, the fragment image 006SG302 can be naturally displayed without discomfort in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A are commonly directed toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). 75 and 80), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A have the same period of time required until they disappear from the display screen. As a result, the relevance between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) has different visibility when the display is started and before it disappears on the display screen (FIG. 75, FIG. 80). Specifically, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it when the display is started, and it is easy to visually recognize it before the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden.

[Form 1-7-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen more than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in the background change effect A. By lengthening the period required to reach , the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed. The number of times of the rotating motion until the display area of the image display device 5 is hidden after being displayed, and the image display device 5 after the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is displayed. and the number of rotation operations until they are hidden in the display area of . By doing so, the relevance between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 68, in both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed. The period during which the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A consists of a white-out display period during which the player cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303, and a game through the white-out image 006SG303. Since it is composed of a white-out display latter period in which the person can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings. In addition to being able to surprise the player, it is possible to reduce discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed with the white-out image 006SG303, and to suitably execute the background change effect A and the strong development effect. .

[Form 2-2]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 68, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 in the background change effect A (white-out display early period and white-out display late period) is 1000 ms. Since the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 in A (white-out display early period and white-out display late period) is 2500 ms, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 causes a transition between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. As the relevance increases, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, so the effects of both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be enhanced. can.

[Form 2-3]
63, the crack display period is longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A, and the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 (white-out display first period and white-out display latter period) ) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. By doing so, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started by the white-out image 006SG303 without a sense of discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
45 and 52, the white-out image 006SG303 displayed from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A are displayed. Since the white-out image 006SG303 is an image displayed in the same manner, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A in which the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner are enhanced in relation to each other. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

[Mode 3-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 70, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is moved and displayed at the speed V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect moves according to the progress of the effect. Since the speed changes from the speed V1 to the low speed V0, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be suitably given to the player, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. .

[Mode 3-2]
Also, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, when the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times in the variable display of 1 and the cut-in effect can be executed only once, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed multiple times. When the cut-in performance is executed once, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo continuous performance is executed only once, and a plurality of pseudo continuous performances are performed when the cut-in performance is executed once. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the game is executed twice. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution status of the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Mode 3-3]
The first timing when the state in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state in the pseudo-continuous effect transitions to the cracked state (the glass plate image 006SG301A), and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect. The white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the two timings, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire display screen (Fig. 48(C), Fig. 55 (See (C)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be differentiated between the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect to enhance interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is moved and displayed at a speed V1 during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 (white-out display early period and white-out display late period). Since the image 006SG303 is moved and displayed at a speed V0 that is lower than the speed V1 from the timing when the display period of the image 006SG303 ends, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 can be enhanced in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed. As shown in FIG. may overlap the period during which the image is moved and displayed at the speed V1, but not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at the speed V0. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the cut-in production from deteriorating.

[Mode 3-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are to be rotated, the first fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. Among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect, the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed more times than the image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. The number of rotation operations performed from the time the image is displayed until the image is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 may be set to be greater than the number of times. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 70, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, the player can see the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. While the background image is invisible, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect has transparency, so that the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through the fragment image 006SG302. is visually recognizable, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect, different impressions are preferably given to the player, and the interest in the game is enhanced. can be done.

[Form 4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is a character image. The image 006SG307 is a transparent image that allows at least part of the image to be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 and a character image. 006SG307 and at least part of it are both recognizable images in a transparent mode (see FIG. 82). By thus varying the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are allowed to rotate, the first fragment image 006SG302 rotates to the first angle by the rotating operation. When the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, at least part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 can be recognized. It may be difficult to recognize at least part of the background image superimposed on the . By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is made rotatable, the first fragment image 006SG302 out of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle in the cut-in effect. Sometimes, a second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 70, the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Further, with respect to the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect, the cut-in effect is at least the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after the crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo-continuous effect. The display of a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is started in a period shorter than the crack display period until the fragment image 006SG302 simulating a part is displayed, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect. Commonly, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 84), and is displayed in a manner of moving in the Z-axis direction. may take longer to disappear in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed while moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) has different visibility when the display is started and before it disappears on the display screen (FIG. 77, FIG. 81). Specifically, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it when the display is started, and it is easy to visually recognize it before the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden.

[Form 5-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen more than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in the background change effect A. By lengthening the period required to reach , the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect are hidden on the display screen in such a manner that they move toward the outside of the display screen (see, for example, FIG. 83A), and the fragment images in the cut-in effect are displayed. The first fragment image 006SG302 out of 006SG302 is not displayed in the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed outside the display screen. It is preferable to hide before moving toward it (see, for example, FIG. 83(B)). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different in appearance between the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the ready-to-win suggesting effect and the weak development effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, with respect to these ready-to-reach suggestive effects and weak development effects, the right crack display period in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect is longer than the pre-operation period in the weak development effect, and the fragment image display period in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect and the fragment in the weak development effect are longer. The length of the image display period may be different (see FIGS. 66 and 67). By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be suitably given, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Form 6-2]
In addition, in the ready-to-reach suggesting effect, the right crack display period may be longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 66). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the ready-to-win suggestion effect from being lowered due to the monotonous effect structure.

[Form 6-3]
Further, as the reach suggestion effect of the present embodiment, a case where the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken after the crack is displayed is executed in a success pattern, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after the crack is displayed. There is a case where the glass plate image 006SG301A is executed in a failure pattern where the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, and a case where the ready-to-reach suggestive effect is executed in the failure pattern, and a fragment image 006SG302 in the case where the reach-indicative effect is executed in the successful pattern. Over 6000 ms, which is longer than the display period (fragment image display period) of 2000 ms, as the right crack display period, the "right" decorative design display area 5R and the "left" decorative design display area 5L are cracked. Since it is displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate to the player that the ready-to-win suggestion effect is not executed in the success pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken.

[Form 6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion production is a production that notifies that reach will be achieved by being executed in a success pattern, it will not become reach by being executed in a failure pattern, that is, rather than reaching reach Since the performance suggests that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is low, the player is asked whether or not the ready-to-win suggestive performance is executed and whether the ready-to-win suggestive performance is executed in a success pattern. It can attract attention and enhance interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, in the case where both the ready-to-win suggestive effect and the weakly developed effect are executable during the variable display of 1, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weakly-developed effect to the ready-to-win suggestive effect. It is possible to execute after starting, and when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the ready-to-win suggesting performance is started before the execution of the weak development performance, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not started. You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the ready-to-reach suggestive presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
At the first timing when the state where the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state in the reach suggesting effect is shifted to the cracked state, and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development effect, In common, a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen (FIG. 49(G), FIG. (See (D)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be differentiated between the ready-to-reach suggestive effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
It is possible to highlight the ready-to-win state decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect, and in the fragment image display period, the period in which the ready-to-reach state glue pattern is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. (see FIGS. 50(I) to 50(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that the reach state has occurred.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach suggesting effect, it is possible to display the action effect image 006SG323 in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the fragment image 006SG302 corresponding to the action of the character image 006SG305, and the timing to start displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301. By displaying the action effect image 006SG323 in (see FIG. 49(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed into a cracked state without a sense of discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the ready-to-reach effect, the timing at which a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the timing in which the glass plate image 006SG301 By displaying the "right" decoration pattern display area 5R and the empty small fragment image 006SG302A for a longer period of time than the action effect image 006SG323, the player is informed that a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301. can be suitably shown.

[Form 6-7-3]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, in the ready-to-reach effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started. acts on the "middle" decorative design display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the motion effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L or the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to prevent the ready-to-win suggestive performance from becoming monotonous by giving a difference in the performance mode of the ready-to-win suggestive performance when acting on the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C.

[Form 6-7-4]
Also, as shown in FIG. 66, in the reach suggestion effect, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period in which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period). is also for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the ready-to-win suggesting performance from becoming monotonous by giving a difference in the performance mode of the ready-to-win suggesting performance when acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form 6-8]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the ready-to-win effect is transparent, so that the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect does not have transparency, the player cannot see at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. , the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 can be differentiated between the ready-to-reach suggestive presentation and the weak development presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, both the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the ready-to-reach effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect change in speed from the display start timing to the display end timing. Since the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in a natural manner in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect and the weak development effect, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
Also, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be longer than the fragment image display period in the ready-to-win suggestive effect (see FIGS. 66 and 67). By doing so, it is possible to make a difference between the ready-to-reach suggestive presentation and the weak development presentation, and to increase interest by various ways of presentation.

[Form 7-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 70, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Further, as shown in FIG. 70, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, an image of the pre-operation state of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promoting effect, and the player pushes the button. 31B is operated, or when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a cut-in effect is executed. The state image after the operation of the push button 31B is displayed. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is 2500 ms, the display period of the image before the operation of the push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the image after the operation of the push button 31B is the whiteout image 006SG303. The display period is 1000 ms, which is the same as the display period. ) and longer than the display period of the post-operation mode image of the push button 31B (post-operation mode image display period), the cut-in effect becomes a monotonous effect structure, and the interest of the cut-in effect decreases. can be prevented.

[Form 8-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 65, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. The background change effect A is a effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 differs between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous effect, the combination of decoration patterns displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, a random combination However, after the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect). By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be suitably given, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Form 8-2]
63 and 65, for the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. When display is possible, a period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change effect A, a period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect, may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Mode 9-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 65, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, the period during which the crack is displayed (crack display period) in the background change effect A is 2000 ms, whereas the period during which the crack is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, which is different in length. . In both the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started at the breaking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A at which the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed. The display period of the image 006SG303 consists of a white-out display early period during which the player cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303, and a white-out display latter period during which the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by using the white-out image 006SG303, and to preferably perform the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous display.

[Mode 9-2]
63 and 65, for the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. In the case where it is possible to display with , may be of different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 10-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 69, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise people. Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed moving from the start to the end of display without changing the speed, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is displayed in white from the start of display. Until the end of the display of the out-image 006SG303, the moving display is performed at the speed V1, and the transition is performed at the speed V0, which is lower than the speed V1. A different impression can be given and the game interest can be enhanced.

[Form 10-2]
A first timing when the state in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked mode changes to the cracked mode in the background change effect A, and a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect B, , a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, and at the second timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIG. 45(G), FIG. (H)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be differentiated between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B to enhance interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed at the speed V0 in the strong development effect B is longer than the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed at the speed V1. It is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different from the production B in how it is shown, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed at the speed V1 in the strong development effect B is the same as the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the speed V0. Since the white-out image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period in which it is moved and displayed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect B from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
Of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, all the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden on the display screen in such a manner that they move toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 83(A)), and the fragment images in the strong development effect B are displayed. The first fragment image 006SG302 out of 006SG302 is hidden on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen. It becomes invisible before moving toward it (see FIG. 83(B)). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be presented differently between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, both the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are images having transparency. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are commonly directed toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). 75 and 76), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B share the same period of time required until they disappear from the display screen. Preferably. By doing so, the relevance between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed while moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), is different between when the display is started and the timing before it is hidden on the display screen (Fig. 75, see FIG. 76). Specifically, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it when the display is started, and it is easy to visually recognize it before the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden.

[Form 10-7-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the plurality of fragments displayed in the background change effect A Among the fragment images 006SG302, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is greater than the number of the fragment images displayed in the strong development effect. It may be larger than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 . By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 is moved to the first position by the rotating operation. , it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. It may be made difficult to recognize at least part of the background image superimposed on the . By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 89, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, the first fragment image 006SG302 is the first fragment image 006SG302. , the second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may have a second angle. By doing so, when the first fragment image 006SG302 has the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 has the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, when both the background change effect A and the strong development effect B can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is set to the timing before the reach, and the strong development effect. The exit B can be executed at the timing after the ready-to-win, and when the background change performance A is executed before the execution of the strong development performance B, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is higher than when it is not executed. You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the background change effect A is executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-9]
Further, for the background change effect A and the strong development effect B shown in FIGS. 63 and 69, after displaying the crack of the first stage on the glass plate image 006SG301, the crack of the first stage is changed to the crack of the second stage. In the case where the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the simulated consecutive effect. and may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 11-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 65, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 59, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect does not have transparency, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A has transparency. Even with the presentation in which is displayed, a different impression can be suitably given, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 12-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 69, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise people. Further, the length of the crack display period in the background change effect A and the crack display period in the strong development effect B are made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are shared. , at least in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed moving in the Z-axis direction is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302, which takes a longer time to disappear in the display area of the image display device 5 than 006SG302 and is displayed while moving in the Z-axis direction in the strong development effect B, moves in the Z-axis direction in the background change effect A. The period required until the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to disappear may be longer. By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be suitably given, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

[Form 13-1]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 66, the background change effect A and the ready-to-reach suggestive effect of the present embodiment are effects executed at different timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, the right crack display period is 4000 ms in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect, whereas the crack display period is 2000 ms in the background change effect A, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestive effect is 1500 ms. On the other hand, the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is 20000 ms, so that even in the effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression is preferably given. , can enhance the game interest.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack mode according to the action of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed from the third crack pre-stage mode to the third crack mode. By being able to change and display (see FIGS. 49 and 45), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner.

[Form 14-1]
Further, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 61 are effects with different execution timings in the variable display, the player can be surprised at various timings during the variable display. can give. Furthermore, the second continuous crack effect can be executed at a timing after the first continuous crack effect, and the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect share the same length of the crack display period and the fragment image. The length of the display period is also common, and when the second continuous crack effect is executed after the first continuous crack effect is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous crack effect is temporarily hidden. To prevent the deterioration of the performance effect due to the display of a new crack even though the fragment image 006SG302 is already displayed, since the crack display period of the second crack performance is started. can be done.

[Form 14-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect share at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Further, the positions at which the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed may differ between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect. By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be shown differently between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 14-3]
A character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed in common with the fragment image 006SG302 in the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect, and the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous crack effect , Jam character image), and the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (for example, a Mumu character image) (Fig. 42 ( F), see FIG. 43(F)), the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be differentiated in how the special image is displayed, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-4]
Also, while the length of the fragment image display period differs between the first crack effect and the second crack effect shown in FIG. may have the same display period length. By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be shown differently between the first crack effect and the second crack effect, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 14-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, there is a pattern in which the second continuous crack effect is executed after the first continuous crack effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous crack effect is executed after the first continuous crack effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the crack effect is not executed, and the second continuous crack effect is executed after the first continuous crack effect is executed, and the second continuous crack effect is executed after the first continuous crack effect is executed. Since the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second continuous cracking presentation and enhance interest.

[Form 14-6]
Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect are both displayed moving without a change in speed from the display start timing to the display end timing. It is possible to increase the relevance between the 1st continuous cracking effect and the 2nd continuous cracking effect and enhance the interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
In addition, for the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect shown in FIG. 61, the white-out image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302, and is displayed in the first continuous crack effect. The display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 that is displayed and the white-out image 006SG303 that is displayed in the second continuous crack effect may be common. By doing so, the relationship between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
In addition, since the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect shown in FIG. The relevance between the breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 71, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5 . Then, the time required until the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden in the background change effect A, and the time required until the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden in the result notification effect when not controlled to the jackpot game state. Since the required time is different, it is possible to inform the player that the game is not properly controlled to the jackpot game state.

[Form 15-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A takes 2500 ms to disappear, and the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks in the result notification effect when not controlled to the jackpot game state. Since it takes 5500 ms until the image containing the is hidden, it is possible to inform the player that the game is not properly controlled to the jackpot game state.

[Form 15-3]
There is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and the largest display size among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification effect (loss). There is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302), and the display size of the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) is larger than that of the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302). It is preferable (for example, see FIG. 46(J) and FIG. 58(D)). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 different in appearance and enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background image in the superimposed relationship to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) is in the superimposed relationship. By using a transmissive image that allows at least part of a certain background image to be recognized (see FIG. 73), it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 look different and more interesting.

[Form 15-5]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (loss) share at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). It is preferable to display in a manner of moving in a direction (for example, see FIGS. 75 and 77). By doing so, it is possible to give relevance to how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and enhance interest.

[Form 15-6]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state in the background change effect A to the broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification effect (miss) The white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the second timing and the display pattern, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. . Specifically, the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (FIG. 45(G)). , see FIG. 58(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (loss), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 71, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Further, during the crack display period in the background change effect A, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification effect, the failure pattern result notification effect is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a corresponding manner. Furthermore, while the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in the mode corresponding to the background change effect A continues until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, the game effect lamp 9 in the mode corresponding to the result notification effect of the failure pattern is continued. The light emission of 9 may be continued until a predetermined condition such as stop of the variable display after completion of the result notification effect of the failure pattern, start of the next variable display, or the like is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the control will not be appropriately performed in an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the second cracked mode when it is notified by the result notification effect that it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked mode in the background change effect A. Before and when the fragment image 006SG302 in the crack effect is displayed, the type of background image is different (see FIGS. 45 (A) to 45 (F), 46 (I), and 46 (K)) The display of the background image before it is notified whether or not to be controlled to the big winning game state by the result notification effect, and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is notified that it will not be controlled to the big winning game state. The modes are different (see FIGS. 58(A) to 58(B) and FIG. 58(D)).

By doing so, it is possible to execute the background change effect A in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state, thereby giving surprise to the player, and furthermore, the glass plate image 006SG301 in the cracked state can be displayed. By using this and changing the display mode of the background image before notifying whether or not to be controlled to the big winning game state, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the control to the big winning game state is not performed.

[Form 18-1]
The background change effect A includes a first predetermined part that displays the character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked manner according to the action of the character image 006SG305, and the glass plate image. and a third predetermined part for displaying a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. a fragment image imitating at least a part of a fourth predetermined part displayed in a form, a fifth predetermined part starting the falling motion of the movable body 32, and at least part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. 006 SG302 is displayed in a sixth predetermined part, and the execution timing is different between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect. A different second motion is started, and after the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden on the display screen of the image display device 5, the second motion of the movable body 32 ends (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 48).

By doing so, the background change effect A for displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 and the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed at different timings, thereby giving surprise to the player at various timings. Furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then moving the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 18-2]
63 and 65, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. It may be possible to change and display. In this case, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and in the pseudo continuous effect the glass plate The length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed in the image 006SG301 to when the first-stage crack changes to the second-stage crack may be different. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 18-3-1]
At the first timing when the state in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state changes to the cracked state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect , a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, and at the second timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIGS. 45(G) and 48(G)). (See (C)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be differentiated between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first motion is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the rendering position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the rendering position, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 48 ( C)). By interlocking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303 in this manner, a sense of unity can be created, and the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the movable object falling period is longer than the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 (white-out display early period and white-out display late period). Here, the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect.

[Form 18-4]
Further, as an effect different from the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 65, it is possible to execute a movable body suggestive effect suggesting that the movable body 32 will be operated during execution of the variable display to indicate that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state. . In the case where the movable body suggestive effect can be executed in this way, the movable body emphasized image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestive effect is executed. When the movable body moves as a pseudo continuous effect, the movable body emphasized image for emphasizing the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 71, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the result notification effect of the success pattern is a effect of displaying a crack in the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then displaying a fragment image 006SG302. 32 is started, and the ascent is finished before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
63 and 71, the background change effect A and the result notification effect shown in FIGS. may be set to be displayed. In this case, the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first-stage crack changes to the second-stage crack, and in the result notification effect, the glass plate The length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed in the image 006SG301 to when the first-stage crack changes to the second-stage crack may be different. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode.

[Form 19-3-1]
A first timing when the state in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked state changes to the cracked state in the background change effect A, and a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (big win). and , the white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, and at the second timing, the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIG. 45(G), FIG. (See (E)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (big hit) to enhance interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the effect position toward the origin position, and when the second action starts, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 56(F)). . By interlocking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303 in this manner, a sense of unity can be created, and the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
71, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 (white-out display first half period and white-out display latter half period), and the fragment image display period is the movable body rising period. Since it is longer than that, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the result notification presentation.

[Form 19-4]
Further, as an effect different from the result notification effect shown in FIG. 71, it is possible to execute a movable body suggesting effect suggesting that the movable body 32 will be operated during execution of the variable display to indicate that the game state will be controlled to a big hit. . In the case where the movable body suggestive effect can be executed in this way, the movable body emphasized image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestive effect is executed. When the movable body 32 moves as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasized image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification effect from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 68, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of the present embodiment are effects executed at different timings in the variable display. can surprise people. Further, the strong development effect A is a effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in response to the falling of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. is also of short duration. Furthermore, in the strong development effect A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the position above the image display device 5 which is the origin position after falling, and the movable body 32 starts to rise after the fragment image display period ends. Since it is designed to do so, it is possible to provide a powerful performance.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the rendering position, and when the first action starts, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 52(B)). . By linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303 in this way, a sense of unity is created, and the effect of the strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 68, in the strong development effect A, a white-out early display period and a white-out late display period are provided. Here, the period during which the movable body 32 falls (movable body falling period) may have substantially the same length as the period during which the movable body 32 falls, and the fragment image display period may be longer than the period during which the movable body falls. By doing so, the production effect of the strong development production can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
In addition, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in FIG. 68, it is possible to execute a movable body suggesting effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to indicate that the game state will be controlled to a big hit. good. In the case where the movable body suggestive effect can be executed in this way, the movable body emphasized image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestive effect is executed. When the movable body 32 moves as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasized image for emphasizing the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area superimposed on the movable body 32 . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the strong development production A production from deteriorating due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
In the background change effect A and the background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the background image can be visually recognized together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when not in use, are displayed with the first visibility, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in the background change effect A. , the first background image 006SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility, and in the background change effect B, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the For example, the crack display area 006SG324) is displayed with the first visibility (see FIGS. 45(E), (F), and FIG. 47(C)).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the background change effect B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different cracked states, can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can respond at various times. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image visible together with the glass plate image 006SG301 varies depending on the type of crack, even if the effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed is preferably different Impression can be given and game interest can be enhanced.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher in visibility than the first visibility and the second visibility (see FIG. 47(C) enlarged view). The production effect of the change production B can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) and the active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) corresponding to variable display can be displayed in the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301. is displayed in a cracked manner, the corresponding image is superimposed in a predetermined range and is not displayed in a specific range (see FIG. 47(C)). , the corresponding image can be preferably displayed.

[Form 21-4]
Further, in the background change effect B shown in FIG. 64, the second stage crack display period may be longer than the first stage crack display period. By doing so, it is possible to make the glass plate image 006SG301 different in presentation between the background change effect A and the background change effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the background change effect A and the dialogue forewarning effect of the present embodiment are effects with different execution timings in the variable display. can surprise you. With regard to the background change effect A and the dialog preview effect, the visibility of the background image may be different between the crack display period in the background change effect A and the crack display period in the dialog preview effect. Further, the crack display period in the dialog preview effect is set to be longer than the crack display period in the background change effect A, and a plurality of crack modes in the dialog preview effect are provided (see FIGS. 45 and 44). The ratio of control to the big win game state when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the second crack mode of the first type is displayed is higher than when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the second crack mode of the second type is displayed. may be higher. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the speech announcement effect, and similarly, even in the effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a different impression is preferably given, and the game interest is increased. can increase

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type with the second crack mode is displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 with the second crack mode of the second type is displayed, it is displayed lower than the predetermined display layer. 45 and 44). By doing so, it is possible to make the glass plate image 006SG301 different in how to show it, and to enhance interest.

[Form 22-3]
A white-out image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common between the background change effect A and the dialog preview effect, and it is preferable that the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the background change effect A and the dialog preview effect. (See, for example, FIGS. 45 and 44). By doing so, it is possible to make the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 different and more interesting.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 can display a corresponding image (for example, first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or active display 006SG103) corresponding to variable display in a special display layer (for example, layer 9 image drawing area). , the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer (for example, layer 9-1 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the special display layer, and a second predetermined display having a lower priority than the special display layer Glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer (for example, layer 4 image drawing area), and special information regarding variable display in a special display layer (for example, layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer (for example, small patterns) can be displayed. 2. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the predetermined display layer, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when the background change effect A is executed, the background change effect B is executed without executing the change effect. When there is, it is possible to execute the change effect (see FIG. 91).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the background change effect B can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Even in the effect in which the image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and the presence or absence of execution of the change effect are different.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change effect is a effect in which the character image 006SG305 is displayed and the character image 006SG305 performs an action acting on the corresponding image to change the display mode of the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 has priority over the predetermined display layer. can be displayed in a lower display layer (eg, layer 3 image drawing area) (see FIG. 91). By doing so, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background change effect B to the minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
By being able to display a change emphasized image (for example, effect image 006SG330) so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer in correspondence with the action of the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 91), Even during execution of the background change effect B, the change effect can be preferably executed.

[Form 24-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A have different display modes, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A suggests that the strong S reach effect (special effect) will be executed. (eg, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N), and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A. (See Figures 45, 92 and 93).

By doing so, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that the player can be surprised at various timings, and the background change effect A can be provided. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently in the strong development effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A and the effect executed after that can be enhanced, so the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed. Even if the effect is given, a different impression can be preferably given, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effects J and N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effects A and B), and when the second special effect is executed. is higher than when the first special effect is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher, and the suggestion mode is a first suggestion mode suggesting that the first special effect is executed; 2, and a second suggestion mode that suggests that the special effect is executed (see FIGS. 92, 93, and 94). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 (for example, fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A includes a suggestive aspect and a transparent aspect in which at least part of the background image displayed on the layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent aspect. is displayed more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive mode (see FIG. 94). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can be rotated, and in the strong development effect A, it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the transmission mode has a greater amount of rotation than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive mode (Fig. 94 reference). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development effect A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part. In the part, a single suggested-mode fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and a plurality of transparent-mode fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see FIG. 93). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A can be increased.

[Form 25]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 70 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible with the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, it is an effect that can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the white-out image 006SG303. (and the fragment image 006SG302) is longer than the white-out display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is invisible, so it is preferable to create a reserve for the crack effect with the operation promotion effect and to create a sense of speed during the fragment image display period. A crack pattern can be realized.

[Form 26]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 70 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible with the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is terminated to change the state to be visible. The fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation promotion effect execution period. By doing so, a crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form 27]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. In the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, at least a part of the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 overlaps with the fragment image display period. This period is shorter than the display period. Also, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 is composed of a white-out display early period and a white-out display late period. Note that the white-out display latter period may be longer than the white-out display initial period. By doing so, while hiding the crack start of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 by the white-out image 006SG303 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, the whiteout is more white than the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents the image 006SG303 from being emphasized.

[Form 28]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. In the production A, the strong development production B, the cut-in production, and the result notification production, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed by displaying the white-out image 006SG303. The fragment image 006SG302 is hidden invisibly from the player. Here, the white-out image 006SG303 may be hidden under the condition that the fragment image 006SG302 has sufficiently moved after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, so that the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from giving a sense of incongruity.

[Form 29]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the previous white-out display period. The fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to crack or has just started to be displayed is hidden from the player so that the fragment image 006SG302 is invisible to the player, and the player visually recognizes the fragment image 006SG302 in the latter period of white-out display in which the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is increased. It is possible. Therefore, in the latter period of the white-out display, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display.

[Mode 30]
In addition, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 63 and 67, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started at the execution timing of the crack effect, and it is possible to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 may differ between the late white-out display period in the background change effect A and the late white-out display period in the weak development effect. By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter half of the white-out display period of the background change effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter half of the white-out display period of the weak development effect, It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

[Mode 31]
In addition, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 63 and 67, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started at the execution timing of the crack effect, and it is possible to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the background change effect A may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the normal state, and the weak development effect may be an effect that can be executed when the game state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 may be different between the white-out display late period in the background change effect A and the white-out display late period in the weak development effect. By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter half of the white-out display period of the background change effect A, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter half of the white-out display period of the weak development effect, It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

[Mode 32]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light using the crack effect light emission data table over the display period of the white-out image 006SG303. From the timing when the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect. Light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks can be preferably performed.

[Mode 33]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and the speakers 8L and 8R are white-out. Since the crack effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is output from the display start timing of the image 006SG303, the effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Mode 34]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. As the effect pattern of the crack effect (the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, there is a first pattern in which the crack is displayed and then the crack is displayed. There is a second pattern that cracks without cracking. Here, when the crack effect is executed in the first pattern and when the crack effect is executed in the second pattern, the sound corresponding to the crack effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) It may be different whether or not the sound that is played) is output. By doing so, it is possible to provide patterns with different impressions in each crack effect.

[Mode 35]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. As the effect pattern of the crack effect (the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, there is a first pattern in which the crack is displayed and then the crack is displayed. There is a second pattern that cracks without cracking. Here, when the break performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern can be actually executed in the second pattern, the break performance of the result report performance of the success pattern is controlled to the jackpot game state from the speakers 8L and 8R. You may output the sound according to the situation. By doing so, it is possible to provide patterns of cracking effects that give different impressions depending on the state.

[Mode 36]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. As the effect pattern of the crack effect (the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the crack is once displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, and then the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without displaying cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301. , there is. Here, when the crack effect is executed in the first pattern, a crack effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301. On the other hand, when the crack effect is executed in the second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is also possible not to output the crack effect sound. By doing so, it is possible to provide crack patterns with different impressions.

[Mode 37]
61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestive effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the fragment image When 006SG302 is displayed, the effect sound (broken effect sound) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a volume higher than the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, the time when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and the time when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed are sharpened, and the crack pattern is impressed.

[Mode 38]
As shown in FIG. 88, as a crack effect in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the character voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the displayed character. When the output is enabled and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the crack effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, the time when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and the time when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed are sharpened, and the crack pattern is impressed.

[Mode 39]
As display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, there are a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B and G). With the value (for example, "30%"), the movement speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the first size in the first pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 of the second size smaller than the first size are different, The second pattern has a variation amount of 0 (for example, "0%"), so that the fragment image 006SG302 of the third size in the second pattern and the fragment image of the fourth size smaller than the third size The operating speed is the same as that of 006SG302 (see FIGS. 73 and 74).

By doing so, the first pattern is affected differently by the animation depending on the size, and the small fragment image 006SG302 flies quickly, and the large fragment image 006SG302 becomes a crack pattern in which the fragment image 006SG302 is slightly slow and falls immediately. It can be used when you want to show movement, and the second pattern, regardless of size, is affected by animation in the same way, and the way it flies and falls in the same way. can be selected.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it gradually falls after the display is started. There are patterns D to F), and the setting of the gravity value differs between the first pattern and the second pattern, so that the falling speed of the fragment image 006SG302 differs (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, it is possible to construct various patterns, which enhances interest.

[Mode 41]
As display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, there are a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B and G). , and the direction of gravitational force is different, the moving direction of the fragment image 006SG302 is different (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 advances, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns, improving interest.

[Form 42]
As display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, there are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern B), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern C). and crack pattern B and crack pattern C, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, the second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A, and "5" for crack pattern B. 3", and the crack pattern C is "7" (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this way, the first parameter is fixed, and a common part is created for the fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

[Form 43]
As display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, there are a first pattern (eg, crack pattern E), a second pattern (eg, crack pattern F), and a third pattern (eg, crack pattern G). Crack pattern F and Crack pattern G, for example, Crack pattern E (first pattern) and Crack pattern F (second pattern) are common in that the first parameter of "gravity" is "0", and "strength The second parameter of "gravity" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, and crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) are different. The first parameter is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5" in common (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this manner, each pattern forms a common portion of the fragment image 006SG302 and is composed of different parameters, thereby constructing a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
As display patterns of the broken image (eg, fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (eg, broken pattern A) and a second pattern (eg, broken pattern A). state, and the broken image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state (for example, a time-saving state, a variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and before and after the broken image is displayed according to the first pattern. , the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer differs between after the split image is displayed by the first pattern and before the split image is displayed by the second pattern. It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different after the divided image is displayed by the second pattern (for example, see FIGS. 45 and 46). . By doing so, different impressions can be given depending on whether the crack patterns A to G are used in the normal state or when the crack patterns A to G are used in the special state, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 45]
The background change effect A is a effect including changing a cracked image (for example, fragment image 006SG302) in the first mode to the second mode, and the image display device 5 is in the normal state and the normal state. In a special state (e.g., time saving state, variable probability state) more advantageous than, in common, an effect image (e.g., white-out image 006SG303) is displayed when the cracked image is displayed in the first mode, and the cracked image is displayed. is hidden at the timing before is displayed in the second mode (for example, see FIGS. 45 and 46). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the white-out image 006SG303 from hiding the first display portion of the split image, thereby giving a sense of discomfort in the split image.

[Form 46]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. As the effect pattern of the crack effect (the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, once the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image is displayed. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of 006SG301 is broken, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without displaying a crack in the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern and Here, the crack effect of the first pattern can be executed in the normal state, and the crack effect of the second pattern can be executed in the time-saving state or the variable probability state, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the crack effect of the first pattern and the second pattern. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the two patterns of cracking rendering may be commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Furthermore, the moving speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the crack effect of the first pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the crack effect of the second pattern may be different. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production effect during the time saving state and the probability changing state by the crack pattern that does not break the tempo of the time saving state and the probability changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in FIGS. 61 to 71, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect. As the effect pattern of the crack effect (the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, once the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the glass plate image is displayed. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of 006SG301 is broken, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without displaying a crack in the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern and Here, the break effect of the first pattern can be executed in the normal state, the break effect of the second pattern can be executed in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the break effect of the first pattern is executed. The ratio of control to the big win game state may be changed between when the split effect of the second pattern is executed. By doing so, since the rate of being controlled to the big hit game state is different according to the split pattern, it is possible to draw attention to the split pattern.

[Form 48]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 of the first type (eg, large fragment image 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (eg, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer ( For example, a second type of fragment image 006SG302 (for example, small fragment image 006SG302) can be displayed multiple times in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 special information (for example, small patterns) relating to variable display can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially The fragment image 006SG302 of the first type is a form in which a character is drawn, and the fragment image 006SG302 of the second type is at least part of a background image displayed in a display layer lower than the specific display layer. This is a recognizable transmission mode (see FIG. 94). By doing so, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes and displaying them, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 49]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 of the first type (eg, large fragment image 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (eg, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer ( For example, a second type of fragment image 006SG302 (for example, small fragment image 006SG302) can be displayed multiple times in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 special information (for example, small patterns) relating to variable display can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially The fragment image 006SG302 of the first type and the fragment image 006SG302 of the second type overlap, and the display modes are different. long (see Figure 94); By doing so, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes and displaying them, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area and layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer (for example, layer 10 special information (for example, a small pattern) relating to variable display can be displayed in the image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area that at least partially overlaps with the operation period of the movable body 32 and does not overlap with the movable body 32, is displayed in the second display area that the movable body 32 overlaps. The display amount is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the display area L2 (see FIG. 94). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be preferably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Mode 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area and layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer (for example, layer 10 special information (for example, a small pattern) relating to variable display can be displayed in the image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least partially, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed from the first display area L1 in which the movable body 32 does not overlap. The second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 moves the first display region L1 so as not to enter the second display region L2. It is displayed in a moving manner (see FIG. 94). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 is superimposed is prepared while recognizing that the fragment has been broken by the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the area where the movable body 32 is superimposed. By doing so, it is possible to provide a lively performance.

[Mode 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area and layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer (for example, layer 10 special information (for example, a small pattern) relating to variable display can be displayed in the image drawing area), the movable body 32 can perform an operation to superimpose on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and At least a part of the operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps, and even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position not superimposed on the display screen, the fragment image 006SG302 continues. is displayed (see FIG. 94). By doing so, while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the fragment image 006SG302 can be preferably displayed so as not to overlook the fragment image 006SG302.

[Mode 53]
In the reach suggestion effect, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A) when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The fragment image 006SG302 of the type requires a shorter period of time to disappear on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 of the first type (see FIGS. 49 and 50). By doing so, the production effect of the production using the crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Mode 54]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern for displaying the second type of split image in conjunction with the motion of the character image 006SG305. Types of background images displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer before one type of split image is displayed and after the first type of split image is displayed by the first pattern. is different, and before the second type of split image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of split image is displayed by the second pattern, the display layer has a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images displayed in are different (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 49 to 51). By doing so, the specific character (for example, the character image 006SG305) appears in common with a plurality of crack patterns, so that the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Mode 55]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern for displaying a first type of split image in conjunction with an action, and the second pattern is a pattern for displaying a second type of split image in conjunction with an action of the character image 006SG305. , when displaying the broken image by the first pattern, an effect image (for example, a white-out image 006SG303) is displayed in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305, and after displaying the fragment image 006SG302 of the first type, a predetermined When the effect image is hidden at the timing and the split image is displayed according to the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305, and after the second type fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image (for example, white-out image 006SG303) is hidden at specific timing (see FIGS. 45, 46, and 49 to 51). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the white-out image 006SG303 from hiding the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Mode 56]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of split images of the second type are displayed in conjunction with the motion of the character image 006SG305. The fragment image 006SG302 of the second type is displayed in a manner that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 of the first type, and the fragment image 006SG302 of the second type is displayed at the second speed. The fragment image 006SG302 of type 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed (see FIGS. 49, 50, 45, and 46). By doing so, it is possible to change the moving speed of the fragment image 006SG302 in accordance with the type of crack pattern, thereby enhancing the rendering effect.

[Form 57]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern for displaying a first type of split image in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305. Expectations for the big win state are different between when the image is displayed and when the divided image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 45, 46, 49 and 50). By doing so, the sense of anticipation for the character image 006SG305 is heightened, and interest is improved by drawing attention to the type of crack pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

(Modification 1)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the white-out display period of each effect is all constant (first continuous crack effect, second continuous crack effect, dialog preview effect, background change effect A , background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, result notification effect V1, strong development effect B and cut-in effect V0) were exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the reach suggesting effect can be used as modified example 1. , the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the crack effect of the result notification effect, the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the horizontal direction (X axis direction), the vertical direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction), and the forward direction (Z-axis direction) toward the player (display speed) may be different.
may be of different degrees.

For example, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the ready-to-reach suggestive effect, the weak development effect, As the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302A, X which moves in the X-axis direction at a speed of Vx1, in the Y-axis direction at a speed of 0, and in the Z-axis direction at a speed of 0 Debris image 006SG302B traveling at 0 speed in the axial direction, Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, 0 speed in the Z-axis direction, 0 speed in the X-axis direction, 0 speed in the Y-axis direction, In addition to the fragment image 006SG302C that advances in the Z-axis direction at a speed Vz1, the fragment image 006SG302 that advances in two of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction, advances in three directions. may have a fragment image 006SG302 that

Further, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the crack effect of the cut-in effect has a velocity of Vx2 in the X-axis direction and a speed of Vx2 in the Y-axis direction. A fragment image 006SG302A that advances at a speed of 0 in the direction of the Z axis, a speed of 0 in the direction of the X axis, a speed of Vy2 in the direction of the Y axis, and a speed of 0 in the direction of the Z axis. In addition to the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C traveling at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and at a speed of Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, Z Of the axial directions, there may be a fragment image 006SG302 that advances in two directions and a fragment image 006SG302 that advances in three directions.

Since the movement of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means that the fragment image 006SG302 is enlarged and displayed, the traveling speed of the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as an enlarged display speed.

Here, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that advances only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that advances only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that advances only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. , in this modification 1, the fragment image 006SG302C differs from the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B in that it is only enlarged and displayed toward the player. It is set longer than the image 006SG302B. In other words, in the split effect of each effect, the fragment image 006SG302C that is enlarged and displayed is displayed, so that a three-dimensional effect can be produced for the player, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B ends. Since the three-dimensional effect can be continuously produced even after the breaking effect, the production effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the crack production.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the ready-to-reach suggestive effect, and the weak development effect. , the result notification effect is the effect group X, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect is the effect group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the crack effect of these effect group X and the crack effect of the effect group Y. Comparing with the displayed fragment image 006SG302C, in this modified example 1, the traveling speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group X in the Z-axis direction is less than the traveling speed Vz2 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group Y in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group Y is set to have a longer period from display start to display end than the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group X by setting the display speed to a high speed (Vz1>Vz2). Therefore, in the present modification 1, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification. The background change effect A and the strong development effect B can be executed at different timings, respectively, so that the player can be surprised by making the player pay attention to these effects at various timings, and furthermore. , the effect included in the effect group X and the effect included in the effect group Y require different periods until the fragment image 006SG302C is hidden, so the same crack effect is executed to display the fragment image 006SG302. Even if the effect is to be played, different impressions can be suitably given to the player depending on the effect, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In particular, in the present modified example 1, the effect included in the effect group Y is set to take a longer time than the effect included in the effect group X until the fragment image 006SG302C disappears. When the cracking effect is executed as the included effect, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when the cracking effect is executed as the effect included in the effect group X. - 特許庁

In addition, in this modified example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed (enlarged) toward the player is provided as an example, but the present invention is applied to this. The fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed (enlarged) toward the player is enlarged and displayed from the display start timing to the display end timing so that the visibility changes. can be By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302A that advances only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that advances only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that advances only in the Z-axis direction are compared. As shown in FIG. 84(C), the fragment image 006SG302C exemplified a form in which the period from display start to display end is set longer than the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B. The period from the start of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction to the end of the display in the specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) that is different from the specific effect. Effect) may be longer than the period from the start to the end of display of the fragment images 006SG302A and B that move only in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. By doing so, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific effect and the predetermined effect (the cut-in effect and the pseudo-continuous effect in the above example) is made different, and the interest of the specific effect and the predetermined effect is made different. can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment and Modification 1, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect , the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden by moving and displayed. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect or background change effect A) is displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. With respect to the fragment image 006SG302 that is hidden by completely moving toward the target and displayed as a specific effect (for example, a strong development effect B or a cut-in effect), a part of the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5. The other fragment image 006SG302 may be hidden while moving out of the display area of the image display device 5 while it is hidden by moving it completely out of the area. By doing so, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the predetermined effect and the specific effect can be differentiated, and the interest in the specific effect and the predetermined effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect. Although a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as each crack effect is displayed moving in a plurality of directions of the X-axis direction, the Y-axis direction, and the Z-axis direction has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the first continuous crack effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second continuous crack effect, the display start position of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different. . By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be shown differently between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, and the interest can be enhanced.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the crack effect of each effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to display a plurality of fragment images 006SG302, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of fragment images 006SG302 to be displayed as a crack effect of the effect may differ depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the length of the whiteout display initial period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is L1, and the period is continuous with the whiteout display initial period, A whiteout display latter period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the whiteout display initial period is displayed has a length L2 (L2>L1).

In addition, the fragment image display period is a period from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A, and has a length L3 (L3>L1+L2) that is longer than the total period of the whiteout display early period and the whiteout late period. It is composed of a first fragment image display period and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2), which is a period contiguous to the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85(B), during the second fragment image display period, a larger number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than during the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the interest in the crack effect. can be done. Furthermore, in the present modified example 2, in the first fragment image display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is not visible to the player due to the whiteout image 006SG303 in the period overlapping the whiteout display early period, while the whiteout image 006SG302 is invisible to the player in the whiteout display latter period. In the period overlapping with the period, the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is the total period of the whiteout display initial period and the whiteout display latter period. Since it is longer than the length (L1+L2), the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player during the white-out display period. In addition, it is possible to prevent the white-out image 006SG303 from being emphasized over the fragment image 006SG302 in the latter period of the white-out display, thereby preventing the game interest of the crack effect from being lowered. there is

Further, in the above embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in effect The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the effect and the result notification effect has transparency, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the pseudo continuous effect and the weak development effect has transparency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, first continuous breaking effect, second continuous breaking effect, speech announcement effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach The fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effects of the suggestive effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect may or may not all be transparent. It does not have to be gendered.

(Modification 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 86 as a third modification, there are a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous cracking effect, a dialog announcement effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a simulated continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and crack effect of result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 changes according to the progress of the effect (in this modification 3 If there is, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is 0 at the fragment image 006SG302 display timing, T1 (T1>0) at the end timing of the white-out display period, and T2 (T2>T1) at the end timing of the white-out display latter period. , T3 (T3>T2) at the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 By doing so, for example, immediately before the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5 When sufficiently scattered on the display area of , the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In particular, in Modification 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time elapses from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks. Since the image 006SG302 can be easily viewed through the image 006SG302, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the rendering effect due to the image displayed as the rendering result of the crack rendering being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to view.

In addition, in the present modification 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect is exemplified in a form in which the transmittance increases according to the progress of the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may decrease as the effect progresses.

(Modification 4)
Furthermore, in Modified Example 3, the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, As the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the crack effect of the result notification effect, a form in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases with the lapse of time from the timing of the break of the glass plate image 006SG301A is exemplified, but the present invention is As shown in FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B), the effect to be executed is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. Fragment image 006SG302 depending on which of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, result notification effect may be different, and even if the effect is the same, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different according to the game state (in FIG. 87, the background change effect A and the weak development effect and the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302).

As shown in FIG. 87, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken as the crack effect and the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed, the whiteout display period ends. By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the weak development effect have different transmittances in a state in which they are visible to the player. Therefore, even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, it is possible to make a difference in the content of the effect. It is possible to enhance the production effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the crack production of the weak development production.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state, and the weak development effect when executed in the time saving state or the probability variable state Even when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state. Since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as the weak development effect when executed has a different transmittance in the state where it is visible to the player, the glass plate image 006SG301A is both displayed in the effect of breaking. Even if there is, it is possible to make a difference in the effect content, so as a crack effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, It is possible to enhance the production effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the breakage production of the development production.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change effect A and the ready-to-reach suggestive effect, the breaking effect is executed as the effect within the background change effect A and the ready-to-reach suggestive effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, a voice corresponding to the displayed character (for example, character voice) may be output. By doing so, it is possible to sharpen the crack effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 88 as Modified Example 5, in the case of outputting the character voice corresponding to the character when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, the character voice is output. The character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of FIG. 88) so that at least a part of the period overlaps with the output period of the cracking sound.

Further, in Modification 5, as shown in FIG. 88, the crack effect sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is louder than the crack sound output when the crack is displayed. (Vol2 in the example of FIG. 88) may be output. By doing so, it is possible to sharpen the cracking effect when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The player can get an impression that the effect is executed, that is, that the background change effect A and the ready-to-win suggesting effect are executed in a success pattern, and the break pattern of these broken effects.

(Modification 6)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the split effect of these effects may be displayed in a rotating manner in addition to a moving display during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display. Furthermore, the number of rotations from the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of the display may differ depending on which of the effects the crack effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89 as Modified Example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous crack effect, the second continuous crack effect, and the crack effect of the speech advance notice effect rotates R3 times from the start of display to the end of display. However, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the crack effect of the strong development effect A is more than R3 from the start of display to the end of display. The fragment image 006SG302 rotated R2 (R3>2) times, which is a small number of times, and displayed as the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the crack effect of the result notification effect, is less than R2 times from the start of display to the end of display. , which is R1 (R2>R1) times.

As described above, in the present modification 6, even if the timings that can be executed during the variable display are different, there is an effect in which the number of rotations from the start of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of the display is the same. A combination of the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, and the dialogue notice effect, a combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo-continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, the strong Like the combination of the development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the relevance within each combination of effects increases, so the effect of effect within the combination of these effects can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the sixth modification, the number of rotations from the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of the display differs depending on which of the effects is the cracking effect. Since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the cut-in effect has a larger number of rotations from the start of the display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the cut-in effect, the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect Effect, speech announcement effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggest effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, crack executed as result notification effect It is possible to increase the variation of presentation and enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 6, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the fragment images 006SG302 reach the first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment images 006SG302. At least part of the background image may be invisible. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, in the case where the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes according to the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302 as described above, instead of rotating all the fragment images 006SG302 synchronously, at least a part of the fragment image 006SG302 Image 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle than other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 is at the first rotation angle, a part of the other fragment image 006SG302 is at the rotation angle of 2, thereby enhancing the production effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. be able to.

(Modification 7)
Further, as the pseudo-continuous effect in the above-described embodiment, the crack effect is executed according to the movement of the movable body 32 after the crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the crack may be displayed as the crack display period after a pre-operation period in which the movable body 32 falls. Further, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the crack display period is composed of a crack front stage display period and a crack rear stage display period as in the background change effect A of the above-described embodiment. After being divided into and displayed, the split effect may be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo continuous effect may be different from the pre-crack display period of the background change effect A of the above embodiment. By doing so, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of the seventh modification, By differentiating the period until the crack in the second stage is displayed between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. It is possible to enhance the production effect when is displayed.

Furthermore, in this modification 7, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the pre-stage action period in which the action of the character and the action of the movable body 32 are performed, like the background change effect A in the above-described embodiment. , but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a pre-stage operation period in which the action of and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed. In this case as well, the crack display period in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect is composed of the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period, and the length of the pre-crack display period in the ready-to-reach suggestive effect is set to that of the background change effect A of the above embodiment. It may be different from the crack front stage display period. By doing so, in the background change effect A of the above-described embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of Modification 7, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two steps, By differentiating the period until the second stage crack is displayed between the background change effect A and the ready-to-reach suggesting effect, it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed, and the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. It is possible to enhance the production effect when is displayed.

(Modification 8)
In the above-described embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as the crack precursor image are placed in the layer 4 image drawing area and the layer 5 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U Although the form of display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the active display area 5F and the Not only the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, but also the layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U may be displayable.

For example, in this modification 8, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A1) to (A5), in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is a layer above the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U It can be displayed in the image drawing area. In addition, according to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the near side, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed so as to radially spread from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After being displayed in the previous stage mode (see FIG. 91 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to the crack mode, part of the crack is in the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U It can be displayed so as to be superimposed (see FIG. 91 (A3)).

Thus, when a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, the first reservation display 006SG101 (second reservation display) and the active display 006SG103 are displayed. In this case, the visibility of the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this case, since the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 91(B1) to (B5), in the background change effect B, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 are displayed in the active display area 5F and the special figure reserve, as described in the above embodiment. It can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the storage display area 5U. In addition, after the crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 in accordance with the action of the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right part of the screen (see FIG. 91 (B1 )), a new crack display area 006SG324 is displayed in two places on the upper right side of the crack display area 006SG324 according to the movement of the character image 006SG305 to start descending, thereby changing the glass plate image 006SG301. The crack pattern changes step by step (see FIG. 91 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, if the crack extends temporarily, the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation Even if it is displayed so as to cover the memory display area 5U, the crack is not displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation memory display area 5U.

Also, even when the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, the character image 006SG305 is superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. Without displaying, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U (see FIG. 91 (B3)). After that, the active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 91 (B4)).

In this way, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the background change effect A that may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U is the active change effect ( Execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted by overlapping the execution period with the action effect by the change character), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked mode, In the background change effect B that does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U, by enabling the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, similarly the crack precursor image is displayed, the presence or absence of the execution of the display layer and the active change effect are different, so that different impressions can be suitably given and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Incidentally, the target of the change effect may be the first suspension display 006SG101 or the second suspension display.

Also, in the background change effect A, the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U is displayed so that a part of the crack is superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U. However, if the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes in such a situation, it becomes difficult to understand whether the change has occurred due to the change effect or the crack mode, which gives the player a sense of distrust. , It is preferable that the change effect can be executed in the background change effect B in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure reservation storage display area 5U does not decrease even if it becomes a crack mode.

Further, in the eighth modification, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in the background change effect A, execution of the active change effect is restricted. After scattering and the whiteout image 006SG303 disappears, the active change effect can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, during reach, etc.). Also, the active change effect may be executed in a simplified mode (for example, a mode in which the active display mode is casually changed at the timing of FIG. 91 (A3) without displaying the changing character). In this way, by performing the change effect in a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display becomes difficult to see due to the break effect, the effects of both the break effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 9)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the strong development effect A is executed, it is determined to develop to the strong S reach effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the production are fragment images 006SG342M in a suggestive mode suggesting that one of a plurality of types of strong S-reach productions A, B, J, and N with different expectations will be executed, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc. may be included.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92A to 92F, the crack effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and after the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. before it is hidden, a fragment image 006SG342M suggesting that a strong S reach effect A or a strong S reach effect B is executed, a fragment image 006SG342J suggesting that a strong S reach effect J is executed, A fragment image 006SG342N and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 suggesting that the strong S reach effect N will be executed are displayed (see FIG. 92(G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, while the fragment image 006SG342M is displayed singularly, the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden. 93 (A1), (A2), and (A2'), and another fragment image 006SG342M is displayed while the fragment image 006SG342J is displayed singly. , 006SG342N are hidden, and when a plurality of transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is notified that the strong S reach effect J will be executed (see FIGS. 93(B1) and (B2)), and the fragment image While 006SG342N is displayed singularly, the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden, and when a plurality of transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is notified that the strong S reach effect N will be executed ( See FIGS. 93(C1) and (C2)).

By doing so, it is possible to increase the relevance between the fragment image in the strong development effect A and the strong S reach effect that is executed thereafter. It can give a different impression to the player and enhance the amusement of the game.

In this modified example, the type of strong S-reach effect to be executed is indicated by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N showing the faces of the types of characters appearing in various strong S-reach effects. However, the suggesting mode is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image is in a mode that can specify the type of the strong S reach effect to be executed. It may be a fragment image displaying related information such as a reach title name and a background image that can identify the type of effect.

In addition, it is suggested that the execution is determined by one of the plurality of fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N being displayed while the others are hidden. Any one of them may be suggested by displaying it larger, displaying it in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Further, the strong S reach effect may be executed while the two or more fragment images are finally displayed.

(Modification 10)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more layer image drawing areas are displayed. It may be made displayable.

For example, in this modification 10, as shown in FIG. 94, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the layer 5-1 in a transparent mode. Displayed in the image drawing area, the small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area above the layer 5-1 image drawing area. Also, in this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image is displayed in each of the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the timing of the crack. Note that one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of the character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect drawn as described in modification 9. It is considered as a mode.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area is a form in which a character is drawn, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area is This is a transmissive mode in which at least part of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the layer 5-2 image drawing area can be recognized. By doing so, by overlapping the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes and displaying them, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are the first display not superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the rendering position. It is composed of an area L1 and a second display area L2 surrounded by a chain double-dashed line indicating the movable body 32 . Then, when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. . By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be preferably displayed while the movable body 32 overlaps the display area of the image display device 5 .

Further, one of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302, which is the first fragment image 006SG302, is displayed in such a manner as to move from the first display region L1 to the second display region L2. Any second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. By doing so, while the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 allows the user to recognize that the image has been broken, by preparing the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1, a lively presentation is provided. can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the crack precursor image, the glass plate image 006SG301 imitating a glass plate is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel, door, rock, etc. For example, a crack precursor image imitating an object other than glass may be applied. Further, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Further, the crack precursor image may be displayed in a plurality of layer image drawing areas so that a crack effect can be individually displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a form in which a glass fragment image 006SG302 that imitates a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image can be displayed was exemplified. , The present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image simulating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. The broken fragment image may be partially displayed. Moreover, although the fragment image is displayed in a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed in a display layer lower than the crack precursor image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the crack patterns A to G are set as the crack patterns in the crack effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect based on the crack patterns of types other than the above. may be executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been illustrated in which the breaking effect can be executed during the execution of the effect such as the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. The breaking effect may be executed independently from other effects other than the breaking effect. In this case, by making the degree of expectation for a big hit different according to the aspect of the break pattern, the break performance may be executed as one of the advance notice performances, and the performance stage, performance mode, and game state are changed. It may be executed as a change effect at the time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the crack effect, the crack is exemplified by setting the glass plate image 006SG301, which is displayed as the crack precursor image, to a substantially central position from the rear side and applying some kind of impact (force) to start the crack. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cracking may be initiated by a setting in which some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front side to a predetermined position of the crack precursor image. Further, the force may be applied to a plurality of locations of the crack precursor image at predetermined timings or at a plurality of timings.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, depending on the type of the advance notice effect, the glass plate image 006SG301 as the crack precursor image may start cracking after it changes to the cracking state, or may suddenly start breaking without changing to the cracking state. Although a case and a certain form have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of notice effect, all crack effects change the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image to a cracked mode. Alternatively, cracking may be started immediately without changing the cracking effect to the cracking mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, an object image (such as a character), a decorative pattern, and a background image displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed. is displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and is displayed with the second visibility lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 The various images to be displayed may be displayed with the first visibility without lowering the visibility, and, for example, a colored effect image may be displayed in a portion representing the crack to make the crack stand out.

In the above-described embodiment, the character image 006SG305 is mainly applied as an example of the object image. may In addition, instead of the character, various changes are possible such as a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, or a target.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cracking rendering is performed when the cracking starts according to the movement of the object image, when the cracking starts according to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the cracking starts according to the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. Although a certain form was exemplified in the case where cracking is started regardless of the action, the present invention is not limited to this, and in all productions, even if cracking is started in accordance with the action of the object image. Alternatively, the cracking may be started according to the motion of the movable body 32 in all effects, or the cracking may be started regardless of the object image or the motion of the movable body 32 in all the effects. In addition, although the movable body 32 as a logo accessory is applied as an example of the movable body, a board-side movable body provided at another location on the game board 2 may be applied, or a movable body other than the game board 2 may be applied. A frame-side movable body provided in the game machine frame 3 may be applied. Furthermore, cracking may be started according to the operation of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the crack effect of the crack effect is started, the white-out image 006SG303 having a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image in a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the form in which the visual recognition of the fragment image 006SG302 is difficult in the period immediately after the start of the effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is necessarily displayed at the start of the crack effect, and the fragment image is displayed. 006SG302 need not be difficult to see.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% on the display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the crack effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect is started by increasing the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the crack effect, that is, by fade-in displaying the fragment image 006SG302. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at time.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying cracks is drawn and arranged in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the image that actually breaks in the layer 5 image drawing area (changes to the fragment image 006SG302) is used as an image. Although the form for drawing and arranging the glass plate image 006SG301A has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , the fragment image 006SG302 may be drawn and arranged as an image in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301A may not be drawn and arranged.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in a cracked manner. The transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for display may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for display in the cracked mode. For example, the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A to be displayed in the cracked mode is set higher than the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the cracked mode (the glass plate image 006SG301 is a non-transmissive image ), the timing at which the crack is displayed and the timing at which the crack effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the cracked state in the layer 4 image drawing area is hidden, the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to the cracked state in the layer 5 image drawing area is performed. Although the form to start is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timing of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the crack mode and the glass plate image 006SG301A changing to the crack mode overlap at least partially. may

In the above-described embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner was exemplified as the crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image is glass. The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the plate image 006SG301 may be an image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 as long as it is an image suggesting that the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked.

In the above-described embodiment, as the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect, the character kicks (see FIG. 45), hammers (see FIG. 49), and punches (see FIG. 49) the glass plate image 006SG301. 51), etc.), the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a mode in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be cracked by a slashing action such as a sword in addition to or instead of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above. In particular, the background change effect of the present embodiment includes a background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaks due to a kick hit); In addition to the background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without any effect (see FIG. 30), as described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken by the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 with the sword (sword image 006SG301A). The background change effect C (breaking by slashing) can be executed, and the ratio of control to the jackpot game state can be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the effect pattern of breaking the glass plate 006SG301A that can be executed as the breaking effect, and to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and break effect as result notification effect, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the embodiment has been exemplified to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the present invention is not limited to this. The white-out image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing (the timing at which the glass plate image 006SG301A starts cracking). By doing so, it is possible to increase the sense of speed from when the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and to provide a powerful and impressive cracking effect.

Furthermore, when the white-out image 006SG303 is not displayed as the crack effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself is broken. may be displayed as follows. By doing so, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling discomfort.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 having transparency is displayed when the crack effect is executed as the background change effect A and the background change effect B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the crack effect is executed as the background change effect A and the background change effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 having no transparency may be displayed. In particular, when the crack effect is executed as the background change effect A and the background change effect B in this way, if the fragment image 006SG302 having transparency is displayed, the image display device 5 is displayed until immediately before the crack effect is executed. A part of the background image displayed in the area may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first continuous crack effect and second continuous crack effect , Dialogue announcement effect, Background change effect A, Background change effect B, Pseudo continuous effect, Reach suggestion effect, Weak development effect, Strong development effect A, Strong development effect B, Cut-in effect, Breaking effect as effects other than result notification effect may be executable. For example, during a variable display, a jackpot game state with a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-variable jackpot controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, or a jackpot game C with two rounds of the number of rounds) state), or in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display, a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot game ends) a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot A with 10 rounds), and notification that the variable display is in progress and not controlled to the jackpot game state. After that, a break performance may be executed as a resurrection performance for notifying again that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. 006SG301A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A case may be provided in which the display of the image 006SG303 and the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A are executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the breaking effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the breaking effect of the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) was exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as these break effects, images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A may be set as break objects (for example, if the crack effect is a dialog preview effect or a cut-in effect, the operation prompting image 006SG310).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, by displaying the white-out image 006SG303 as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and at least part of the background image are temporarily rendered invisible to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed as an image between the image 006SG301A and the background image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the background change effect A and the breaking effect of the ready-to-reach suggesting effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the front side. Although the present invention is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as these crack effects, the image of the character is drawn and arranged in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (FIGS. 3 and 4). 4), the character may act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the back side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal plane image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the strong development effect is shown. In the cracking effect in the effect that the execution itself such as the cut-in effect suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than in the execution of other effects, the fragment image 006SG302 can be stereoscopically viewed. It may be displayed as a 3D image. By doing so, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as the breaking effect makes the player recognize that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is high when the strong development effect or the cut-in effect is executed. can be done.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialog announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the simulated continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and break effect of the result notification effect, the form of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the strong development effect and cut-in effect are shown. A broken performance in a performance that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to a big hit game state is higher than when other performances are executed by itself, and a broken performance in performances other than these strong development performances and cut-in performances. , the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be varied. By doing so, for example, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect of the strong development effect and the cut-in effect can be changed to the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, and the background change effect. A, Background change effect B, Pseudo-continuous effect, Reach suggestion effect, Weak development effect, Result notification effect By making it slower than the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect, strong development effect and cut-in During execution of the effect, the player can be made to recognize that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is high due to the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue announcement effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect As the break effects of the production, the strong development production A, the strong development production B, the cut-in production, and the result notification production, a fragment image 006SG302 having transparency is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects such as a strong development effect and a cut-in effect can be performed by themselves. The presence or absence of fragment image 006SG302 transparency is determined by the cracking effect in the effect that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the execution of , and the cracking effect in the effect other than the strong development effect and the cut-in effect. can be different. By doing so, it is possible for the player to recognize whether or not the ratio of control to the big win game state is high depending on whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the crack effect is transparent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, by allowing game balls to enter the big winning hole, more winning balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the start winning hole or the general winning hole 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easier for game balls to enter the winning opening than in the normal state, and it is easier to be controlled to the big win game state. If it is a game state that is advantageous for the player such as, the time saving state or the variable probability state may be the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means,
The display means is
A split image can be displayed in a specific display layer,
A background image can be displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
controlling light emission of the light emitting means using a specific luminance data table when the split image is displayed;
Light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using the specific luminance data table until a specific timing in the display period of the split image, and light emission of the light emitting means is performed using the luminance data table corresponding to the background image after the specific timing. control,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images